Top Banner
Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches Published: 2012-03-17 Revision 6 Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.
284
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 EthernetSwitches

Published: 2012-03-17

Revision 6

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 2: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Juniper Networks, Inc.1194 North Mathilda AvenueSunnyvale, California 94089USA408-745-2000www.juniper.net

This product includes the Envoy SNMPEngine, developed by Epilogue Technology, an IntegratedSystemsCompany. Copyright© 1986-1997,Epilogue Technology Corporation. All rights reserved. This program and its documentation were developed at private expense, and no partof them is in the public domain.

This product includes memory allocation software developed by Mark Moraes, copyright © 1988, 1989, 1993, University of Toronto.

This product includes FreeBSD software developed by the University of California, Berkeley, and its contributors. All of the documentationand software included in the 4.4BSD and 4.4BSD-Lite Releases is copyrighted by the Regents of the University of California. Copyright ©1979, 1980, 1983, 1986, 1988, 1989, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994. The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

GateD software copyright © 1995, the Regents of the University. All rights reserved. Gate Daemon was originated and developed throughrelease 3.0 by Cornell University and its collaborators. Gated is based on Kirton’s EGP, UC Berkeley’s routing daemon (routed), and DCN’sHELLO routing protocol. Development of Gated has been supported in part by the National Science Foundation. Portions of the GateDsoftware copyright © 1988, Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Portions of the GateD software copyright © 1991, D.L. S. Associates.

This product includes software developed by Maker Communications, Inc., copyright © 1996, 1997, Maker Communications, Inc.

Juniper Networks, Junos, Steel-Belted Radius, NetScreen, and ScreenOS are registered trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc. in the UnitedStates and other countries. The Juniper Networks Logo, the Junos logo, and JunosE are trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc. All othertrademarks, service marks, registered trademarks, or registered service marks are the property of their respective owners.

Juniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document. Juniper Networks reserves the right to change, modify,transfer, or otherwise revise this publication without notice.

Products made or sold by Juniper Networks or components thereof might be covered by one or more of the following patents that areowned by or licensed to Juniper Networks: U.S. Patent Nos. 5,473,599, 5,905,725, 5,909,440, 6,192,051, 6,333,650, 6,359,479, 6,406,312,6,429,706, 6,459,579, 6,493,347, 6,538,518, 6,538,899, 6,552,918, 6,567,902, 6,578,186, and 6,590,785.

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet SwitchesCopyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.All rights reserved.

Revision HistoryDecember 2010—Revision 1March 2011—Revision 2July 2011—Revision 3September 2011—Revision 4November 2011—Revision 5March 2012—Revision 6

The information in this document is current as of the date on the title page.

YEAR 2000 NOTICE

Juniper Networks hardware and software products are Year 2000 compliant. Junos OS has no known time-related limitations through theyear 2038. However, the NTP application is known to have some difficulty in the year 2036.

SOFTWARE LICENSE

The terms and conditions for using this software are described in the software license contained in the acknowledgment to your purchaseorder or, to the extent applicable, to any reseller agreement or end-user purchase agreement executed between you and Juniper Networks.By using this software, you indicate that you understand and agree to be bound by those terms and conditions.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.ii

Page 3: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Generally speaking, the software license restricts the manner in which you are permitted to use the software andmay contain prohibitionsagainst certain uses. The software license may state conditions under which the license is automatically terminated. You should consultthe license for further details.

For complete product documentation, please see the Juniper NetworksWeb site at www.juniper.net/techpubs.

ENDUSER LICENSE AGREEMENT

The Juniper Networks product that is the subject of this technical documentation consists of (or is intended for use with) Juniper Networkssoftware. Use of such software is subject to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement (“EULA”) posted at

http://www.juniper.net/support/eula.html. By downloading, installing or using such software, you agree to the terms and conditionsof that EULA.

iiiCopyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 4: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.iv

Page 5: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table of Contents

About This Topic Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

How to Use This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

List of EX Series Guides for Junos OS Release 12.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

Downloading Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx

Documentation Symbols Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx

Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi

Requesting Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii

Self-Help Online Tools and Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii

Opening a Case with JTAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii

Part 1 Switch and Components Overview and Specifications

Chapter 1 EX4200 Switches Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Uplink Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Power over Ethernet Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

EX4200 Switch Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Chassis Physical Specifications for EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

EX4200 Switch Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Chapter 2 Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

LCD Panel in EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

LCD Panel Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

LCD Panel Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Field-Replaceable Units in EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Chassis Status LEDs in EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Network Port LEDs in EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Management Port LEDs in EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Power Supply in EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

AC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

PoE Power Budget and AC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

AC Power Supply LEDs in EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

DC Power Supply LEDs in EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Uplink Modules in EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

SFP Uplink Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

SFP+ Uplink Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

vCopyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 6: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

XFP Uplink Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Chapter 3 Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Console Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . 39

RJ-45 to DB-9 Serial Port Adapter Pinout Information for an EX Series

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . 41

Optical Interface Support in EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

SFP+ Direct Attach Cables for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Standards Supported by These Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . 77

Virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches . . . . . 85

Part 2 Planning for Switch Installation

Chapter 4 Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Site Preparation Checklist for EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

General Site Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . 95

Chapter 5 Mounting and Clearance Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Rack Requirements for EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Cabinet Requirements for EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Requirements for Mounting an EX4200 Switch on a Desktop or Wall . . . . . . . . . 101

Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX4200

Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Chapter 6 Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Network Cable Specifications for EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Chapter 7 Planning Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Power Specifications for EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

AC Power Cord Specifications for EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Chapter 8 Planning the Virtual Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Understanding EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis Hardware

Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Ports Used to Interconnect Virtual Chassis Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Number of Switches, Required Software Releases, andMember Roles That

You Configure in the Virtual Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Virtual Chassis Module—a Required Component for Virtual Chassis That

Include EX4500 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.vi

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 7: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Switch Role and Member ID on the LCD Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Planning EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . 115

Adding a New EX4200 Switch to an Existing EX4200 Virtual Chassis (CLI

Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Adding a NewSwitch to an Existing Virtual ChassisWithin the SameWiring

Closet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Adding a New Switch from a DifferentWiring Closet to an Existing Virtual

Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Adding a New Switch to an Existing Preprovisioned Virtual Chassis Using

Autoprovisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Part 3 Installing and Connecting the Switch and Switch Components

Chapter 9 Installing the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Installing and Connecting an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Unpacking an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Parts Inventory (Packing List) for an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Mounting an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Mounting an EX4200 Switch on a Desk or Other Level Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Mounting an EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Mounting an EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Mounting an EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet . . . . . 139

Mounting an EX4200 Switch on aWall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Chapter 10 Installing Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Installing and Removing EX4200 Switch Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Installing a Power Supply in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Installing a Fan Tray in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Installing an Uplink Module in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Chapter 11 Connecting the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Tools and Parts Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to Earth

Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Special Instructions to Follow Before Connecting Earth Ground to a

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Connecting AC Power to an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Connecting DC Power to an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out-of-Band Management . . 163

Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Chapter 12 Performing Initial Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

EX4200 Default Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure) . . . . . . . . . 175

viiCopyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Table of Contents

Page 8: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Part 4 Removing Switch Components

Chapter 13 Removing Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Installing and Removing EX4200 Switch Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Removing a Power Supply from an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Removing a Fan Tray from an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Removing an Uplink Module from an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Disconnecting a Fiber-Optic Cable from an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Disconnecting a Virtual Chassis Cable from an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Replacing aMember Switch of an EX3300, EX4200, or EX4500 Virtual Chassis

Configuration (CLI Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Remove, Repair, and Reinstall the Same Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Remove a Member Switch, Replace It with a Different Switch, and Reapply

the Old Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Remove a Member Switch and Make Its Member ID Available for

Reassignment to a Different Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Part 5 Switch and Component Maintenance

Chapter 14 Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Maintaining Fiber-Optic Cables in EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Part 6 Troubleshooting Switch Components

Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Troubleshooting Network Interfaces on EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

The interface on the port in which an SFP or SFP+ transceiver is installed

in an SFP+ uplink module is down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Troubleshooting Virtual Chassis Port Connectivity on an EX4200 Switch . . . . . 202

Virtual Chassis port (VCP) connection does not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Part 7 Returning Hardware

Chapter 16 Returning the Switch or Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Returning an EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement . . . . . . 205

Locating the Serial Number on an EX4200 Switch or Component . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Listing the Switch and Components Details with the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Locating the Chassis Serial Number ID Label on an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . 206

Locating the Serial Number ID Labels on FRUs in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . 207

Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX

Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Packing an EX4200 Switch or Component for Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Packing an EX4200 Switch for Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Packing EX4200 Switch Components for Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.viii

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 9: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Part 8 Safety Information

Chapter 17 General Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Definitions of Safety Warning Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Fire Safety Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Qualified Personnel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Chapter 18 Radiation and Laser Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . 219

General Laser Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Class 1 Laser Product Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Laser BeamWarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Chapter 19 Installation and Maintenance Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Installation Instructions Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Ramp Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-Mounting Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Wall-MountingWarning for EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Grounded Equipment Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Battery Handling Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Jewelry Removal Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Lightning Activity Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Operating Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Product Disposal Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Chapter 20 Power and Electrical Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

AC Power Disconnection Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Power Sources for Redundant Power SuppliesWarning for EX4200

Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

DC Power Disconnection Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

TN Power Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Action to Take After an Electrical Accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

ixCopyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Table of Contents

Page 10: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Part 9 Compliance Information

Chapter 21 Compliance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches . . . . . . 256

Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

European Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Korea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

FCC Part 15 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Nonregulatory Environmental Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . 259

Declaration of Conformity for EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.x

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 11: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

List of Figures

Part 1 Switch and Components Overview and Specifications

Chapter 1 EX4200 Switches Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Figure 1: EX4200 Switch with 48 Gigabit Ethernet Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Figure 2: EX4200 Switch with 24 Gigabit Ethernet Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Figure 3: EX4200-24F Switch with 24 SFP Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Figure 4: EX4200 Switch Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Chapter 2 Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Figure 5: LCD Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Figure 6: Chassis Status LEDs in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Figure 7: LEDs on the Network Ports on the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Figure 8: LEDs on the Uplink Module Ports on the SFP Uplink Module . . . . . . . . . . 21

Figure 9: LEDs on the Uplink Module Ports on the SFP+ Uplink Module . . . . . . . . 21

Figure 10: LEDs on the Uplink Module Ports on the XFP Uplink Module . . . . . . . . 22

Figure 11: LEDs on the Management Port on an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Figure 12: 320 W AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Figure 13: 600W and 930W AC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Figure 14: DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Figure 15: Fan Tray Used in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Figure 16: Airflow Through the EX4200 Switch Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Figure 17: SFP Uplink Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Figure 18: SFP+ Uplink Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Figure 19: XFP Uplink Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Part 2 Planning for Switch Installation

Chapter 5 Mounting and Clearance Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Figure 20: Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for

EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Figure 21: Airflow Through the EX4200 Switch Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Chapter 7 Planning Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Figure 22: AC Plug Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Chapter 8 Planning the Virtual Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Figure 23: EX4200SwitchesMounted on a Single Rack andConnected in a Ring

Topology Using Short and Long Cables: Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Figure 24: EX4200SwitchesMounted on aSingle Rack andConnected in a Ring

Topology Using Short and Long Cables: Option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Figure 25: EX4200SwitchesMounted on a Single Rack andConnected in a Ring

Topology Using Short and Medium Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

xiCopyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 12: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Figure 26: EX4200 Switches Mounted on Adjacent Racks and Connected in a

Ring Topology Using Medium and Long Cables: Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Figure 27: EX4200 Switches Mounted on Adjacent Racks and Connected in a

Ring Topology Using Medium and Long Cables: Option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Part 3 Installing and Connecting the Switch and Switch Components

Chapter 9 Installing the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Figure 28: Unpacking an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Figure 29: Attaching Rubber Feet to an EX4200 Switch Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Figure 30: Attaching the Mounting Bracket to the Side Panel of the Switch . . . . 134

Figure 31: Mounting the Switch on Two Posts in a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Figure 32: Attaching the Front Bracket to the Side-Rail Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Figure 33: Attaching the Side-Rail Bracket to the Switch Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Figure 34: Mounting the Switch to the Front Posts in a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Figure 35: Sliding the Rear Brackets to the Rear of a Four-Post Rack . . . . . . . . . 138

Figure 36: Attaching Wall-Mount Brackets to the Switch Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Figure 37: Mounting the Switch on aWall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Chapter 10 Installing Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Figure 38: Installing a Power Supply in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Figure 39: Installing a Fan Tray in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Figure 40: Installing an Uplink Module in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Figure 41: Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Figure 42: Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . 152

Chapter 11 Connecting the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Figure 43: Connecting the Grounding Lug to an EX4200 Switch on a Four-Post

Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Figure 44: Connecting a Grounding Cable to an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Figure 45: Connecting the AC Power Cord Retainer Clip to an AC Power Supply

in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Figure 46: Connecting an AC Power Cord to an AC Power Supply in an EX4200

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Figure 47: DC Power Supply in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Figure 48: Removing the Terminal Block Cover from a DC Power Supply . . . . . . 162

Figure 49: Securing Ring Lugs to the Terminals on the DC Power Supply . . . . . . 163

Figure 50: Ethernet Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Figure 51: Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out-of-Band

Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Figure 52: Ethernet Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Figure 53: Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console Through

a Console Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Figure 54: Connecting an EX Series Switch Directly to a Management

Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Figure 55: Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to an Optical Transceiver Installed in

an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Chapter 12 Performing Initial Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Figure 56: LCD Panel in an EX3200, EX4200, EX4500, or EX8200 Switch . . . . . 176

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.xii

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 13: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Part 4 Removing Switch Components

Chapter 13 Removing Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Figure 57: Removing a Power Supply from the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Figure 58: Removing a Fan Tray from an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Figure 59: Sliding the Screwdriver to the Narrow Part of the Keyhole . . . . . . . . . 186

Figure 60: Removing an Uplink Module from an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Figure 61: Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Figure 62: Virtual Chassis Cable Connector in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Part 7 Returning Hardware

Chapter 16 Returning the Switch or Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Figure 63: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on an EX4200 Switch . . . . . 207

Part 8 Safety Information

Chapter 20 Power and Electrical Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Figure 64: Place a Component into an Antistatic Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

xiiiCopyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

List of Figures

Page 14: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.xiv

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 15: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

List of Tables

Part 1 Switch and Components Overview and Specifications

Chapter 1 EX4200 Switches Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Table 1: EX4200 Switch Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Table 2: Physical Specifications of the Switch Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Table 3: CLI Equivalents of Terms Used in Documentation for EX4200

Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Chapter 2 Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Table 4: LCD Panel Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Table 5: Chassis Status LEDs in an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Table 6: Link/Activity LED on Network Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Table 7: Status LED on Network Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Table 8: Link/Activity LED on the Management Port on EX4200 Switches . . . . . . 24

Table 9: Status LED on the Management Port on EX4200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . 25

Table 10: Power Supply Rating and PoE Power Budget for EX4200 Switch

Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Table 11: AC Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Table 12: DC Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Chapter 3 Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Table 13: Network Port Connector Pinout Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Table 14: EX Series Switches Console Port Connector Pinout Information . . . . . . 39

Table 15: EX Series Switches RJ-45 to DB-9 Serial Port Adapter Pinout

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Table 16: Management Port Connector Pinout Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Table 17: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit

Ethernet SFP Transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Table 18: Optical Interface Support for Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers . . . . . . . . 55

Table 19: Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ Transceivers . . . . . 61

Table 20: Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet XFP Transceivers . . . . . 66

Table 21: Software Support for SFP+ Active Direct Attach Cables for EX Series

Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Table 22: Software Support for SFP+ Passive Direct Attach Cables for EX Series

Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Table 23: SFP+ Direct Attach Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Table 24: Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Table 25: Virtual Chassis Ports (VCPs) Connector Pinout Information . . . . . . . . . 85

Part 2 Planning for Switch Installation

Chapter 4 Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

xvCopyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 16: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 26: Site Preparation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Table 27: Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Table 28: EX Series Switch Environmental Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Chapter 5 Mounting and Clearance Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Table 29: Rack Requirements and Specifications for the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Table 30: Cabinet Requirements and Specifications for the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Chapter 7 Planning Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Table 31: AC Power Supply Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Table 32: DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Table 33: AC Power Cord Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Chapter 8 Planning the Virtual Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Table 34: Number of Switches and Switch Roles for an EX4200 Virtual Chassis,

per Junos OS Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Table 35: Number of Switches and Switch Roles for an EX4500 Virtual Chassis,

per Junos OS Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Table36:NumberofSwitchesandSwitchRoles foraMixedEX4200andEX4500

Virtual Chassis, per Junos OS Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Table 37: Virtual Chassis Components to Consider when Planning an EX4200

and EX4500 Virtual Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Table 38: Cabling Requirements for a Virtual Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Part 3 Installing and Connecting the Switch and Switch Components

Chapter 9 Installing the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Table 39: Packing List for an EX4200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Chapter 11 Connecting the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Table 40: Tools and Parts Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to Earth

Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Table 41: Special Instructions to Follow Before Connecting Earth Ground to a

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.xvi

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 17: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

About This Topic Collection

• How to Use This Guide on page xvii

• List of EX Series Guides for Junos OS Release 12.1 on page xvii

• Downloading Software on page xx

• Documentation Symbols Key on page xx

• Documentation Feedback on page xxi

• Requesting Technical Support on page xxii

How to Use This Guide

Complete documentation for the EX Series product family is provided on webpages at

http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/en_US/release-independent/information-products/

pathway-pages/ex-series/product/index.html. We have selected content from these

webpages and created a number of EX Series guides that collect related topics into a

book-like format so that the information is easy to print and easy to download to your

local computer.

Software features for EX Series switches are listed by platform and by Junos OS release

in a standalone document. See EX Series Switch Software Features Overview.

This guide, Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches, collects together

information about the EX4200 switches. The release notes are at

http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/en_US/junos12.1/

information-products/topic-collections/release-notes/12.1/junos-release-notes-12.1.pdf.

List of EX Series Guides for Junos OS Release 12.1

DescriptionTitle

Component descriptions, site preparation, installation,replacement, and safety and compliance informationfor EX2200 Ethernet switches

Complete Hardware Guide for EX2200 Ethernet Switches

Component descriptions, site preparation, installation,replacement, and safety and compliance informationfor EX3200 Ethernet switches

Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 Ethernet Switches

Component descriptions, site preparation, installation,replacement, and safety and compliance informationfor EX3300 Ethernet switches

Complete Hardware Guide for EX3300 Ethernet Switches

xviiCopyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 18: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

DescriptionTitle

Component descriptions, site preparation, installation,replacement, and safety and compliance informationfor EX4200 Ethernet switches

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Component descriptions, site preparation, installation,replacement, and safety and compliance informationfor EX4500 Ethernet switches

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4500 Ethernet Switches

Component descriptions, site preparation, installation,replacement, and safety and compliance informationfor EX6210 Ethernet switches

Complete Hardware Guide for EX6210 Ethernet Switches

Component descriptions, site preparation, installation,replacement, and safety and compliance informationfor EX8208 Ethernet switches

Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches

Component descriptions, site preparation, installation,replacement, and safety and compliance informationfor EX8216 Ethernet switches

Complete Hardware Guide for EX8216 Ethernet Switches

Component descriptions, site preparation, installation,replacement, and safety and compliance informationfor the XRE200 External Routing Engine

Complete Hardware Guide for the XRE200 External Routing Engine

Software feature descriptions, configuration examples,and tasks for Junos OS for EX Series switches

Complete Software Guide for Junos®OS for EX Series EthernetSwitches, Release 12.1

Software feature descriptions, configuration examplesand tasks, and reference pages for configurationstatements and operational commands (Thisinformationalsoappears in theCompleteSoftwareGuidefor Junos®OS for EX Series Ethernet Switches, Release12.1.)

Software Topic Collections

Junos®OS Access Privilege Configuration Guide

Junos®OS for EX Series Ethernet Switches, Release 12.1: Access andUser Management

Junos®OSfor EXSeries EthernetSwitches, Release 12.1: AccessControl

Junos®OS for EX Series Ethernet Switches, Release 12.1: ConfigurationManagement

Junos®OSfor EXSeries EthernetSwitches, Release 12.1: ClassofService

Junos®OS for EXSeries EthernetSwitches, Release 12.1: DeviceSecurity

Junos®OS for EX Series Ethernet Switches, Release 12.1: EthernetSwitching

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.xviii

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 19: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

DescriptionTitle

Junos®OS for EX Series Ethernet Switches, Release 12.1: EX3300,EX4200, and EX4500 Virtual Chassis

Junos®OSfor EXSeries EthernetSwitches, Release 12.1: EX8200VirtualChassis

Junos®OS for EX Series Ethernet Switches, Release 12.1: Fibre Channelover Ethernet

Junos®OSforEXSeriesEthernetSwitches,Release 12.1: HighAvailability

Junos®OS for EX Series Ethernet Switches, Release 12.1: Interfaces

Junos®OS for EX Series Ethernet Switches, Release 12.1: Layer 3Protocols

Junos®OS for EX Series Ethernet Switches, Release 12.1: MPLS

Junos®OS for EX Series Ethernet Switches, Release 12.1: Multicast

Junos®OS for EX Series Switches, Release 12.1: Network Managementand Monitoring

Junos®OS for EX Series Switches, Release 12.1: Port Security

Junos®OS for EX Series Switches, Release 12.1: Power over Ethernet

Junos®OS for EX Series Ethernet Switches, Release 12.1: Routing Policyand Packet Filtering

Junos®OS for EX Series Ethernet Switches, Release 12.1: SoftwareInstallation

Junos®OSfor EXSeriesEthernetSwitches, Release 12.1: Spanning-TreeProtocols

Junos®OS for EX Series Ethernet Switches, Release 12.1: SystemMonitoring

Junos®OS for EX Series Ethernet Switches, Release 12.1: SystemServices

Junos®OS for EX Series Ethernet Switches, Release 12.1: SystemSetup

Junos®OSfor EXSeriesEthernetSwitches, Release 12.1: User Interfaces

xixCopyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

About This Topic Collection

Page 20: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Downloading Software

You can download Junos OS for EX Series switches from the Download Software area

at http://www.juniper.net/customers/support/ . To download the software, youmust

have a Juniper Networks user account. For information about obtaining an account, see

http://www.juniper.net/entitlement/setupAccountInfo.do.

Documentation Symbols Key

Notice Icons

DescriptionMeaningIcon

Indicates important features or instructions.Informational note

Indicates a situation that might result in loss of data or hardwaredamage.

Caution

Alerts you to the risk of personal injury or death.Warning

Alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser.Laser warning

Text and Syntax Conventions

ExamplesDescriptionConvention

To enter configuration mode, type theconfigure command:

user@host> configure

Represents text that you type.Bold text like this

user@host> show chassis alarms

No alarms currently active

Represents output that appears on theterminal screen.

Fixed-width text like this

• Apolicy term is anamedstructure thatdefinesmatchconditionsandactions.

• Junos OS System Basics ConfigurationGuide

• RFC 1997, BGP Communities Attribute

• Introduces important new terms.

• Identifies book names.

• Identifies RFCand Internet draft titles.

Italic text like this

Configure the machine’s domain name:

[edit]root@# set system domain-namedomain-name

Represents variables (options for whichyou substitute a value) in commands orconfiguration statements.

Italic text like this

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.xx

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 21: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Text and Syntax Conventions

ExamplesDescriptionConvention

• To configure a stub area, include thestub statement at the [edit protocolsospf area area-id] hierarchy level.

• The console port is labeledCONSOLE.

Represents names of configurationstatements, commands, files, anddirectories; IP addresses; configurationhierarchy levels; or labels on routingplatform components.

Plain text like this

stub <default-metricmetric>;Enclose optional keywords or variables.< > (angle brackets)

broadcast | multicast

(string1 | string2 | string3)

Indicates a choice between themutuallyexclusive keywords or variables on eitherside of the symbol. The set of choices isoften enclosed in parentheses for clarity.

| (pipe symbol)

rsvp { # Required for dynamicMPLS onlyIndicates a comment specified on thesame lineas theconfiguration statementto which it applies.

# (pound sign)

community namemembers [community-ids ]

Enclose a variable for which you cansubstitute one or more values.

[ ] (square brackets)

[edit]routing-options {static {route default {nexthop address;retain;

}}

}

Identify a level in the configurationhierarchy.

Indention and braces ( { } )

Identifies a leaf statement at aconfiguration hierarchy level.

; (semicolon)

J-Web GUI Conventions

• In the Logical Interfacesbox, selectAllInterfaces.

• To cancel the configuration, clickCancel.

Represents J-Web graphical userinterface (GUI) items you click or select.

Bold text like this

In the configuration editor hierarchy,select Protocols>Ospf.

Separates levels in a hierarchy of J-Webselections.

> (bold right angle bracket)

Documentation Feedback

We encourage you to provide feedback, comments, and suggestions so that we can

improve the documentation. Send e-mail to [email protected] the

following:

xxiCopyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

About This Topic Collection

Page 22: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Document URL or title

• Page number if applicable

• Software version

• Your name and company

Requesting Technical Support

Technical product support is available through the JuniperNetworksTechnicalAssistance

Center (JTAC). If you are a customer with an active J-Care or JNASC support contract,

or are covered under warranty, and need post-sales technical support, you can access

our tools and resources online or open a case with JTAC.

• JTAC policies—For a complete understanding of our JTAC procedures and policies,

review the JTAC User Guide located at

http://www.juniper.net/us/en/local/pdf/resource-guides/7100059-en.pdf .

• Product warranties—For product warranty information, visit

http://www.juniper.net/support/warranty/ .

• JTAC hours of operation—The JTAC centers have resources available 24 hours a day,

7 days a week, 365 days a year.

Self-Help Online Tools and Resources

For quick and easy problem resolution, Juniper Networks has designed an online

self-service portal called the Customer Support Center (CSC) that provides youwith the

following features:

• Find CSC offerings: http://www.juniper.net/customers/support/

• Search for known bugs: http://www2.juniper.net/kb/

• Find product documentation: http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/

• Find solutions and answer questions using our Knowledge Base: http://kb.juniper.net/

• Download the latest versions of software and review release notes:

http://www.juniper.net/customers/csc/software/

• Search technical bulletins for relevant hardware and software notifications:

https://www.juniper.net/alerts/

• Join and participate in the Juniper Networks Community Forum:

http://www.juniper.net/company/communities/

• Open a case online in the CSC Case Management tool: http://www.juniper.net/cm/

Toverify serviceentitlementbyproduct serial number, useourSerialNumberEntitlement

(SNE) Tool: https://tools.juniper.net/SerialNumberEntitlementSearch/

Opening a Casewith JTAC

You can open a case with JTAC on theWeb or by telephone.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.xxii

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 23: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Use the Case Management tool in the CSC at http://www.juniper.net/cm/ .

• Call 1-888-314-JTAC (1-888-314-5822 toll-free in the USA, Canada, and Mexico).

For international or direct-dial options in countries without toll-free numbers, see

http://www.juniper.net/support/requesting-support.html .

xxiiiCopyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

About This Topic Collection

Page 24: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.xxiv

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 25: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

PART 1

Switch and Components Overview andSpecifications

• EX4200 Switches Overview on page 3

• Component Descriptions on page 13

• Component Specifications on page 37

1Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 26: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.2

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 27: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 1

EX4200 Switches Overview

• EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview on page 3

• EX4200 Switch Models on page 5

• Chassis Physical Specifications for EX4200 Switches on page 6

• Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 7

• Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 8

• EX4200 Switch Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping on page 9

EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview

Juniper Networks EX Series Ethernet Switches provide scalable connectivity for the

enterprise market, including branch offices, campus locations, and data centers. The

switches run the Juniper Networks Junos operating system (Junos OS), which provides

Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching, routing, and security services. The same Junos OS code

base that runs on EX Series switches also runs on all Juniper Networks J Series, M Series,

MX Series, and T Series routers and SRX Series devices.

• EX4200 Switches on page 3

• Uplink Modules on page 4

• Power over Ethernet Ports on page 4

EX4200 Switches

Juniper Networks EX4200 Ethernet Switches provide connectivity for medium- and

high-density environments and scalability for growing networks. These switches can be

deployed wherever you need high density of Gigabit Ethernet ports (24 to 480 ports) or

redundancy. Typically, EX4200 switches are used in large branch offices, campus wiring

closets, and data centers where they can be positioned as the top device in a rack to

provide connectivity for all the devices in the rack.

You can connect individual EX4200 switches together to form one unit andmanage the

unit as a single chassis, called a Virtual Chassis. You can addmore member switches to

the Virtual Chassis as needed, up to a total of 10 members.

EX4200switchesareavailable inmodelswith24or48portswitheitherall portsequipped

for Power over Ethernet (PoE/PoE+) or only 8ports equipped for PoE. Allmodels provide

ports that have 10/100/1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet connectors and optional 1-gigabit

3Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 28: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

small form-factor pluggable (SFP) transceivers, 10-gigabit small form-factor pluggable

(SFP+) transceivers, or 10-gigabit small form-factor pluggable (XFP) transceivers for

use with fiber connections.

Additionally, a 24-port model provides 100Base-FX/1000Base-X SFP ports. This model

is typically used as a small distribution switch.

All EX4200 switches have dedicated 64-Gbps Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs) that allow

you to connect the switches to each other. You can also use optional uplinkmodule ports

to connect members of a Virtual Chassis across multiple wiring closets.

To provide carrier-class reliability, EX4200 switches include:

• Dual redundant power supplies that are field-replaceable and hot-swappable. An

optional additional connection to an external power source is also available.

• A field-replaceable fan tray with three fans. The switch remains operational if a single

fan fails.

• RedundantRoutingEngines inaVirtualChassis configuration. This redundancyenables

graceful Routing Engine switchover (GRES) and nonstop active routing (NSR).

• Junos OSwith its modular design that enables failed system processes to gracefully

restart.

EX4200 switches have these features:

• Run under Junos OS for EX Series switches

• Have options of 24-port and 48-port models

• Have options of full (all ports) PoE/PoE+ capability or partial (8 ports) PoE capability

• Have optional uplink modules that provide connection to distribution switches

Uplink Modules

Optional uplink modules are available for all EX4200 switches. Uplink modules provide

two ports for installing 10-gigabit small form-factor pluggable (XFP) transceivers, four

ports for installing 1-gigabit small form-factor pluggable (SFP) transceivers, or two ports

for installing 10-gigabit small form-factor pluggable (SFP+) transceivers. You can use

XFP, SFP, or SFP+ ports to connect an access switch to a distribution switch or to

interconnect member switches of a Virtual Chassis across multiple wiring closets.

Power over Ethernet Ports

PoEportsprovideelectrical current todevices through thenetworkcables so that separate

power cords for devices such as IP phones, wireless access points, and security cameras

are unnecessary.

PoE was first defined in the IEEE 802.3af standard. Starting with Junos OS Release 11.1,

EX4200 switches support enhanced PoE, a Juniper Networks extension to the IEEE

302.3af PoE standard that increases the amount of power per PoE port. A later standard,

IEEE 802.3at, defined PoE+. An IEEE 802.3af powered device operates normally when

connected to an IEEE 802.3at (PoE+) power sourcing equipment.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.4

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 29: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

EX4200 switches with an AC power supply installed have options of full (all 24 or 48

ports) PoE/PoE+ capability or partial (8 ports) PoE capability. EX4200 switches with a

DC power supply installed do not provide PoE.

Full PoE/PoE+models are primarily used in IP telephony environments. Partial PoE

models are used in environmentswhere, for example, only a fewports forwireless access

points or security cameras are required.

RelatedDocumentation

EX4200 Switch Models on page 5•

• Field-Replaceable Units in EX4200 Switches on page 18

• Site Preparation Checklist for EX4200 Switches on page 91

• PoE and EX Series Switches Overview

EX4200 SwitchModels

The EX4200 switch is available with 24 or 48 ports and with partial or full Power over

Ethernet (PoE) capability. EX4200 switches with a DC power supply installed do not

provide PoE.

NOTE: This topic uses the term PoE to refer to both PoE and PoE+ unlessthere is a need to distinguish between the two.

Table 1 on page 5 lists the EX4200 switch models.

Table 1: EX4200 SwitchModels

JunosOSReleaseRequired

Power Supply(Minimum)Number of PoE-enabled PortsPortsModel

9.0R2 or later320WFirst 8 ports24 Gigabit EthernetEX4200-24T

9.0R2 or later320WFirst 8 ports48 Gigabit EthernetEX4200-48T

9.0R2 or later600WAll 24 ports24 Gigabit EthernetEX4200-24P

9.0R2 or later930WAll 48 ports48 Gigabit EthernetEX4200-48P

9.0R2 or later320W–24 small form-factorpluggable (SFP)transceivers

EX4200-24F

9.0R2 or later190W024 Gigabit EthernetEX4200-24T-DC

9.0R2 or later190W048 Gigabit EthernetEX4200-48T-DC

9.0R2 or later190W–24 small form-factorpluggable (SFP)transceivers

EX4200-24F-DC

5Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 1: EX4200 Switches Overview

Page 30: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 1: EX4200 SwitchModels (continued)

JunosOSReleaseRequired

Power Supply(Minimum)Number of PoE-enabled PortsPortsModel

9.0R2 or later930WAll 24 ports (PoE+)24 Gigabit EthernetEX4200-24PX

9.0R2 or later930WAll 48 ports (PoE+)48 Gigabit EthernetEX4200-48PX

CAUTION: Mixing different types (ACandDC) of power supplies in the samechassis is not supported.

RelatedDocumentation

Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 7•

• Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 8

• EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview on page 3

Chassis Physical Specifications for EX4200 Switches

The EX4200 switch chassis is a rigid sheet-metal structure that houses the hardware

components. Table 2 on page 6 summarizes the physical specifications of the EX4200

switch chassis.

Table 2: Physical Specifications of the Switch Chassis

ValueDescription

1.75 in. (4.45 cm)Chassis height

• 17.25 in. (43.82 cm)

• 19 in. (48.2 cm) with mounting brackets attached

Chassis width

• Without power supply installed—17 in. (43.18 cm)

• With power supply installed:

• 320WAC power supply or 190WDC power supply installed—17 in. (43.18 cm)

• 600W or 930WAC power supply installed—19.25 in. (48.9 cm)

Chassis depth

• 320WAC power supply: 2.5 lb (1.1 kg)

• 600W and 930WAC power supplies: 3.1 lb (1.4 kg)

• 190WDC power supply: 2.5 lb (1.1 kg)

Weight

NOTE: The weight of an EX4200 switch with one power supply installed isbetween 16–18 lb (7.2–8.2 kg).

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.6

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 31: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

RelatedDocumentation

Rack Requirements for EX4200 Switches on page 99•

• Cabinet Requirements for EX4200 Switches on page 100

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch on page 131

• Installing and Connecting an EX4200 Switch on page 127

• Installing and Removing EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 143

Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch

The front panel of an EX4200 switch consists of the following components:

• Network ports—depending on the switch model, either:

• 10/100/1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet ports, some or all of which are enabled for

Power over Ethernet (PoE)

• 100Base-FX/1000Base-X SFP ports for use with fiber-optic connections

• Uplink module ports—SFP, SFP+, or XFP ports (Installing the uplink module is an

optional feature.)

• LCD panel and the LCD navigation buttons

• Chassis status LEDs

• Network port LEDs

Figure 1 on page 7 shows the front panel of an EX4200 switch with 48 Gigabit Ethernet

ports. Figure 2 on page 7 shows the front panel of an EX4200 switch with 24 Gigabit

Ethernet ports. Figure 3 on page 8 shows the front panel of an EX4200-24F switch with

24 SFP ports for use with fiber-optic connectors.

Figure 1: EX4200 Switch with 48 Gigabit Ethernet Ports

Figure 2: EX4200 Switch with 24 Gigabit Ethernet Ports

7Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 1: EX4200 Switches Overview

Page 32: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Figure 3: EX4200-24F Switch with 24 SFP Ports

RelatedDocumentation

Chassis Status LEDs in EX4200 Switches on page 19•

• Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 8

• Network Port LEDs in EX4200 Switches on page 20

• Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX4200 Switch on page 38

• LCD Panel in EX4200 Switches on page 13

• Optical Interface Support in EX4200 Switches on page 42

• Installing and Removing EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 143

• Installing an Uplink Module in an EX4200 Switch on page 147

• Removing an Uplink Module from an EX4200 Switch on page 185

Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch

The rear panel of the EX4200 switch consists of the following components:

• Fan tray

• Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs)

• USB port

• Temperature shutdown LED

• Management Ethernet port

• Console port

• ESD point

• Power supply or power supplies

Figure 4 on page 9 shows the rear panel of an EX4200 switch. All EX4200 switches

have the same rear panel. The 320WAC power supply and the 190WDC are flush with

the chassis. The 600WAC power supply and 930WAC power supply extend out of the

chassis by 2.25 in. Power cord retainer clips extend out of the power supply by 3 in.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.8

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 33: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Figure 4: EX4200 Switch Rear Panel

g020

084

Virtualchassisports

USBport

ManagementEthernetport

Fantray

Consoleport

PowerSupply 1

PowerSupply 0

Protective earthingterminal (on side panel)

ESDpoint

Temperatureshutdown LED

RelatedDocumentation

Field-Replaceable Units in EX4200 Switches on page 18•

• Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 7

• USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch on page 37

• Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch on page 30

• Power Supply in EX4200 Switches on page 25

• Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 238

• Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 153

• Installing and Removing EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 143

• Understanding EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis Hardware Configurations on

page 111

EX4200 Switch Hardware and CLI TerminologyMapping

This topic describes the hardware terms used in EX4200 switch documentation and the

corresponding terms used in the Junos OS command line interface (CLI). See Table 3 on

page 9.

Table 3: CLI Equivalents of Terms Used in Documentation for EX4200 Switches

AdditionalInformation

Item inDocumentationValue (CLI)Description (CLI)Hardware Item (CLI)

“Chassis PhysicalSpecifications forEX4200 Switches” onpage 6

Switch chassis–One of the following:

• EX4200-24T

• EX4200-24P

• EX4200-48T

• EX4200-48P

• EX4200-24F

• EX4200-24PX

• EX4200-48PX

Chassis

9Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 1: EX4200 Switches Overview

Page 34: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 3: CLI Equivalents of Terms Used in Documentation for EX4200 Switches (continued)

AdditionalInformation

Item inDocumentationValue (CLI)Description (CLI)Hardware Item (CLI)

–Routing Enginen is a value in the rangeof 0-1. The valuecorresponds to the slotnumber.

One of the following:

• EX4200-24T, 8 PoE

• EX4200-24P, 24PoE

• EX4200-48T, 8 PoE

• EX4200-48P, 24PoE

• EX4200-24F

• EX4200-24PX, 24PoE+

• EX4200-48PX, 48PoE+

Routing Engine (n)

UnderstandingInterface NamingConventions on EXSeries Switches

The switch does nothave actual FPCs. Inthis case, the FPCrefers to the switchitself.

Value of n is always 0.OnEX4200standaloneswitches:

Abbreviated name ofthe Flexible PICConcentrator (FPC)

One of the following:

• EX4200-24T

• EX4200-24P

• EX4200-48T

• EX4200-48P

• EX4200-24F

• EX4200-24PX

• EX4200-48PX

FPC (n)

UnderstandingEX3300, EX4200, andEX4500 VirtualChassis Components

In this case, the FPCnumber refers to themember IDassigned tothe switch.

n is a value in the rangeof 0-9.

On EX4200 VirtualChassis:

• Member ID of theswitch within theVirtual Chassis

UnderstandingInterface NamingConventions on EXSeries Switches

The switch does nothave actual PICdevices; see entries forPIC 0 through PIC 1 forthe equivalent item onthe switch.

n is a value in the rangeof 0-1.

Abbreviated name ofthe Physical InterfaceCard (PIC).

PIC (n)

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.10

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 35: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 3: CLI Equivalents of Terms Used in Documentation for EX4200 Switches (continued)

AdditionalInformation

Item inDocumentationValue (CLI)Description (CLI)Hardware Item (CLI)

“Front Panel of anEX4200 Switch” onpage 7

Built-in network portson the front panel ofthe switch

PIC 0One of the following:

• 24x 10/100/1000Base-T

• 24x 100Base-FX/1000Base-X

• 48x 10/100/1000Base-T

“Uplink Modules inEX4200 Switches” onpage 31

Uplink moduleinstalled on the frontpanel of the switch

PIC 1One of the following:

• 2x 10GE SFP+

• 4x GE SFP

• 2x 10GE XFP

“Optical InterfaceSupport in EX4200Switches” on page 42

Optical transceiversn is a value equivalentto the number of theport in which thetransceiver is installed.

Abbreviated name ofthe transceiver

Xcvr (n)

“Power Supply inEX4200 Switches” onpage 25

AC or DC power supplyn is a value in the rangeof 0-1. The valuecorresponds to thepower supply slotnumber.

One of the following:

• PS 320WAC

• PS 600WAC

• PS 930WAC

• PS 190WDC

Power supply (n)

“Cooling System andAirflow in an EX4200Switch” on page 30

Fan tray–Fan trayFan tray

RelatedDocumentation

• EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview on page 3

11Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 1: EX4200 Switches Overview

Page 36: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.12

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 37: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 2

Component Descriptions

• LCD Panel in EX4200 Switches on page 13

• Field-Replaceable Units in EX4200 Switches on page 18

• Chassis Status LEDs in EX4200 Switches on page 19

• Network Port LEDs in EX4200 Switches on page 20

• Management Port LEDs in EX4200 Switches on page 24

• Power Supply in EX4200 Switches on page 25

• AC Power Supply LEDs in EX4200 Switches on page 29

• DC Power Supply LEDs in EX4200 Switches on page 29

• Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch on page 30

• Uplink Modules in EX4200 Switches on page 31

LCD Panel in EX4200 Switches

The LCD panel on the front panel of the switch shows two lines of text, each of which

can contain amaximumof 16 characters. The LCDpanel displays a variety of information

about the switch and also provides amenu to perform basic operations such as initial

setup and reboot.

There are two navigation buttons—Menu and Enter—to the right of the LCD panel.

See Figure 5 on page 13.

Figure 5: LCD Panel

You can configure the second line of the LCD panel to display a custommessage. If the

LCD panel is configured to display a custommessage, theMenu button and the Enter

buttonaredisabled.SeeConfiguring theLCDPanelonEXSeriesSwitches (CLIProcedure).

13Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 38: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

The LCDpanel has a backlight. If the LCDpanel is idle for 60 seconds, the backlight turns

off. You can turn on thebacklight by pressing theMenuorEnterbuttononce. After turning

on the backlight, you can toggle between the LCD panel menus by pressing theMenu

button and navigate through themenu options by pressing the Enter button.

NOTE: Thechassis viewer in the J-Web interfacealsodisplays theLCDpanel.From the J-Web interface, you can view real-time status information in theLCD panel. See Dashboard for EX Series Switches.

This topic describes:

• LCD Panel Modes on page 14

• LCD Panel Menus on page 15

LCD Panel Modes

The LCD panel operates in four modes: boot, idle, status, andmaintenance.

The LCD panel operates in bootmode during switch reboot. The bootmode displays the

key milestones in the switch boot process. The boot mode does not have any menu

options. After the boot process is complete, the LCD panel automatically reverts to the

Idle menu.

In an EX4200 switch that is not a member of a Virtual Chassis, the first line of the LCD

panel displays the slot number, the role of the switch, and hostname. For a standalone

EX4200 switch, the slot number is always 00 and the role is always RE (for master).

In an EX4200 switch that is amember of a Virtual Chassis, the first line of the LCD panel

displays:

• The slot number (the member ID for the Virtual Chassis member)

• Role of the switch in aVirtual Chassis (RE formaster,BK for backup, and LC for linecard

member)

• Hostname

In the idlemode, the second line displays themode of the network ports’ Status LED and

the number of chassis alarms. The number of alarms is updated every second.

In the status mode, the second line displays:

• Virtual Chassis port (VCP) status (for an EX4200 switch that is amember of a Virtual

Chassis)

• Status of the power supply

• Status of the fan and temperature

• Version of Junos OS for EX Series switches loaded on the switch

In themaintenancemode, the second line displays one of the following options that you

can use to configure and troubleshoot the switch:

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.14

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 39: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• System halt

• System reboot

• Load rescue

• Request VC port (for an EX4200 switch that is a member of a Virtual Chassis)

• Factory default

• System EZSetup

LCD Panel Menus

The LCD panel has threemenus: Idle, Status, andMaintenance. Toggle between the LCD

panelmenusbypressing theMenubutton.Navigate through themenuoptionsbypressing

the Enter button.

Table 4 on page 15 describes the LCD panel menu options.

Table 4: LCD Panel Menu Options

DescriptionMenu

In the Idle menu:

• Press Enter to cycle through the Status LEDmodes:

• SPD (speed)

• ADM (administrative status)

• DPX (duplex)

• POE (Power over Ethernet)

See Network Port LEDs in EX3200 Switches or “Network Port LEDs in EX4200 Switches” on page 20 forinformation on the Status LEDmodes.

• PressMenu to exit the Idle menu and go to the Status menu.

IDLE

15Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 2: Component Descriptions

Page 40: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 4: LCD Panel Menu Options (continued)

DescriptionMenu

The Status menu has the following options:

• Show VCP status—Choose one of the following:

• Press the Enter button to display the Virtual Chassis port (VCP) status: Up, Down, Disabled.

NOTE: This option is available only for an EX4200 switch that is amember of a Virtual Chassis configuration.It is not available for an EX3200 switch.

• Press theMenu button to go to the next option in the Status menu.

• Show PSU status—Choose one of the following:

• Press the Enter button to display the status of the power supply: OK, Failed, Absent.

• Press theMenu button to go to the next option in the Status menu.

• Show Environment status—Choose one of the following:

• Press the Enter button to display the status of the fan and temperature:

• Fan status: OK, Failed, Absent

• Temp status: OK, High, Shutdown

• Press theMenu button to go to the next option in the Status menu.

• Show Junos version—Choose one of the following:

• Press the Enter button to display the version of Junos OS for EX Series switches loaded on the switch.

• Press theMenu button to go to the next option in the Status menu.

• EXIT STATMENU?—Choose one of the following:

• Press the Enter button to exit the Status menu. Then press theMenu button to go to the Maintenancemenu.

• OnanEX4200switch that is amember of aVirtual Chassis configuration, press theMenubutton to returnto the Show VCP status option.

NOTE: This option is available only for an EX4200 switch that is amember of a Virtual Chassis configuration.It is not available for an EX3200 switch.

If you do not want users to use Status menu options, disable the entire menu or individual menu options. SeeConfiguring the LCD Panel on EX Series Switches (CLI Procedure).

STATUS

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.16

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 41: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 4: LCD Panel Menu Options (continued)

DescriptionMenu

The Maintenancemenu has the following options to configure and troubleshoot the switch:

• SYSTEMHALT?—Choose one of the following:

• Press the Enter button to halt the switch. Press the Enter button again to confirm the halt.

• Press theMenu button to go to the next option in the Maintenancemenu.

• SYSTEM REBOOT?—Choose one of the following:

• Press the Enter button to reboot the switch. Press the Enter button again to confirm the reboot.

• Press theMenu button to go to the next option in the Maintenancemenu.

• LOAD RESCUE?—Choose one of the following:

• Press the Enter button to roll back the switch to the rescue configuration. Press the Enter button againto confirm the rollback.

• Press theMenu button to go to the next option in the Maintenancemenu.

• REQUEST VC PORT?—Choose one of the following:

• Press the Enter button to configure an uplinkmodule port or an EX4200-24F network port to be a VirtualChassis port (VCP) or to delete a VCP from the switch configuration (when you delete the VCP, the portis reset to an uplink module port or an EX4200-24F network port).

NOTE: This option is available only for an EX4200 switch that is amember of a Virtual Chassis configuration.It is not available for an EX3200 switch.

• Press theMenu button to go to the next option in the Maintenancemenu.

• FACTORY DEFAULT?—Choose one of the following:

• Press the Enter button to restore the switch to the factory default configuration. Press the Enter buttonagain to confirm the restoration.

• Press theMenu button to go to the next option in the Maintenancemenu.

• ENTER EZSETUP?—Choose one of the following:

• Press the Enter button to launch EZSetup. Press the Enter button again to confirm the launch.

NOTE: You can use the ENTER EZSETUP option only if the switch is in the factory default configuration.

For informationaboutEZSetup, see “ConnectingandConfiguringanEXSeriesSwitch(J-WebProcedure)”on page 175.

• Press theMenu button to go to the next option in the Maintenancemenu.

• EXIT MAINTMENU?—Choose one of the following:

• Press the Enter button to exit theMaintenancemenu. Then press theMenu button to go to the Idlemenu.

• Press theMenu button to go to the System Halt option.

If youdonotwant users touseMaintenancemenuoptions, disable theentiremenuor individualmenuoptions.See Configuring the LCD Panel on EX Series Switches (CLI Procedure).

MAINT(MaintenanceMenu)

RelatedDocumentation

Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 7•

• Field-Replaceable Units in EX4200 Switches on page 18

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 173

17Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 2: Component Descriptions

Page 42: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure) on page 175

Field-Replaceable Units in EX4200 Switches

Field-replaceable units (FRUs) are components that you can replace at your site. The

FRUs in the switch are:

• Power supply

• Fan tray

• Uplink module

• SFP transceiver

• SFP+ transceiver

• XFP transceiver

NOTE: Uplinkmodules are not part of the standard package andmust beordered separately.

The power supply, fan tray, uplink module, and transceivers are hot-removable and

hot-insertable: You can remove and replace themwithout powering off the switch or

disrupting switch functions.

NOTE: If you have a Juniper J-Care service contract, register any addition,change, or upgrade of hardware components athttps://www.juniper.net/customers/csc/management/updateinstallbase.jsp.

Failure to do so can result in significant delays if you need replacement parts.This note applies if you change the type of power supply or add a new typeof uplinkmodule. It does not apply if you replace these componentswith thesame type of component.

RelatedDocumentation

Installing an Uplink Module in an EX4200 Switch on page 147•

• Installing a Power Supply in an EX4200 Switch on page 144

• Removing a Power Supply from an EX4200 Switch on page 182

• Installing a Fan Tray in an EX4200 Switch on page 146

• Removing a Fan Tray from an EX4200 Switch on page 183

• Installing an Uplink Module in an EX4200 Switch on page 147

• Removing an Uplink Module from an EX4200 Switch on page 185

• Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 149

• Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 187

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.18

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 43: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Chassis Status LEDs in EX4200 Switches

The front panel of an EX4200 switch has three LEDs on the far right side of the panel,

next to the LCD panel (see Figure 6 on page 19).

Figure 6: Chassis Status LEDs in an EX4200 Switch

Table 5 on page 19 describes the chassis status LEDs in an EX4200 switch, their colors

and states, and the status they indicate. You can view the colors of the three LEDs

remotely through the CLI by issuing the operational mode command show chassis lcd.

Table 5: Chassis Status LEDs in an EX4200 Switch

State and DescriptionColorLED Label

There is no alarm.UnlitALM (Alarm)

There is a major alarm.

NOTE: When you connect power to the switch, the Alarm(ALM) LED lights red. This behavior is normal. Plugging anactive Ethernet cable into the management (MGMT) port onthe switch completes the network link and turns off the ALMLED. (See “Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network forOut-of-Band Management” on page 163.)

Connecting the switch to a dedicatedmanagement consoleinstead of a network does not affect the ALM LED. The LEDremains red until the switch is connected to a network.

Red

There is a minor alarm.

NOTE: The Alarm (ALM) LED lights amber if you commit aconfiguration to make it active on the switch and do not alsocreate a rescue configuration to back it up. To save themostrecently committed configuration as the rescue configuration,enter the operational mode command request systemconfiguration rescue save.

Amber

• On steadily—Junos OS for EX Series switches has beenloaded on the switch.

• Blinking—The switch is booting.

GreenSYS (System)

19Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 2: Component Descriptions

Page 44: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 5: Chassis Status LEDs in an EX4200 Switch (continued)

State and DescriptionColorLED Label

• On steadily—The switch is themaster in the Virtual Chassisconfiguration.

• Blinking—The switch is the backup in the Virtual Chassisconfiguration.

• Off—The switch is a linecardmember in the Virtual Chassisconfiguration.

GreenMST (Master)

Amajor alarm (red) indicates a critical error condition that requires immediate action.

A minor alarm (amber) indicates a noncritical condition that requires monitoring or

maintenance. Aminor alarm that is left uncheckedmight cause interruption in service or

performance degradation.

NOTE: Theamberglowof theAlarmLEDthat indicatesaminoralarmcloselyresembles the red glow that indicates amajor alarm.

All three LEDs can be lit simultaneously.

RelatedDocumentation

Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 7•

• Checking Active Alarms with the J-Web Interface

• Understanding Alarm Types and Severity Levels on EX Series Switches

Network Port LEDs in EX4200 Switches

Each network port on the switch has two LEDs. The four figures in this topic show the

location of those LEDs:

• Figure 7 on page 21 shows the location of the LEDs on the network ports on the front

panel.

• Figure 8 on page 21 shows the location of the LEDs on the uplink module ports on the

SFP uplink module.

• Figure 9 on page 21 shows the location of the LEDs on the uplink module ports on the

SFP+ uplink module.

• Figure 10 on page 22 shows the location of the LEDs on the uplinkmodule ports on the

XFP uplink module.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.20

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 45: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Figure 7: LEDs on the Network Ports on the Front Panel

Figure 8: LEDs on the Uplink Module Ports on the SFP Uplink Module

Figure 9: LEDs on the Uplink Module Ports on the SFP+ Uplink Module

21Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 2: Component Descriptions

Page 46: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Figure 10: LEDs on the Uplink Module Ports on the XFP Uplink Module

g020

108

Link/ActivityLED

Link/ActivityLED

Status LED Status LED

Port 0 Port 1

The LEDs labeled Link/Activity LED in Figure 7 on page 21, Figure 8 on page 21, Figure 10

on page 22, and Figure 9 on page 21 indicate link activity. The LEDs labeled Status LED

in Figure 7 on page 21, Figure 8 on page 21, Figure 10 on page 22, and Figure 9 on page 21

indicate the status of one of the four port parameters. The port parameters are

administrative status, duplex mode, Power over Ethernet (PoE) status, and speed.

Table 6 on page 22 describes the Link/Activity LED.

Table 6: Link/Activity LED on Network Ports

State and DescriptionColorLED

• Blinking—The port and the link are active, and there is linkactivity.

• On steadily—The port and the link are active, but there is nolink activity.

• Off—The port is not active.

GreenLink/Activity

Table 7 on page 23 describes the Status LED. From the Idle menu of the LCD, use the

Enterbuttonon theLCDpanel to togglebetween theADM,DPX,POE, andSPD indicators.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.22

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 47: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 7: Status LED on Network Ports

State and DescriptionLCD IndicatorLED

Indicates the administrative status (enabled or disabled). Thestatus indicators are:

• Green—Administrative status enabled.

• Unlit—Administrative status disabled.

LED: ADMStatus

Indicates the duplex mode.

The uplink module ports are always set to full-duplex;therefore, the LED is always green.

The status indicators for network ports on the front panel are:

• Green—Port is set to full-duplex mode.

• Unlit—Port is set to half-duplex mode.

LED: DPX

Indicates the PoE status on switches with PoE-enabled ports.

Here the termPOE refers to both PoE and PoE+ as applicable.

PoE is not enabled on uplink module ports; therefore, the LEDfor those ports is always unlit.

The status indicators for network ports on the front panel are:

• Green—PoE is enabled on the port.

• Amber—PoE is enabled on the port, but no power is drawnfrom the port because of one of the following:

• No device that draws power from the port is connectedto the port.

• A device that draws power from the port is connected tothe port, but the device is not drawing any power fromthe port.

• Unlit—PoE is not enabled on the port.

LED: POE

Indicates the speed.LED: SPD

The speed indicators for network ports on the front panel are:

• One blink per second—10 Mbps

• Two blinks per second—100Mbps

• Three blinks per second—1000Mbps

The speed indicators for network ports on the SFP uplinkmodule are:

• Green—1000Mbps

• Unlit—10/100Mbps

The speed indicators for network ports on the SFP+ uplinkmodule are:

• Green—The speed of the transceiver installed in the port isthe same as the speed at which the uplink module port isconfigured to operate.

23Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 2: Component Descriptions

Page 48: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 7: Status LED on Network Ports (continued)

State and DescriptionLCD IndicatorLED

Unlit—The speed of the transceiver installed in the port isnot the same as the speed at which the uplink module portis configured to operate.

The speed of the XFP uplink module ports is always 10 Gbps;therefore, the LED is always green.

RelatedDocumentation

Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 7•

• Uplink Modules in EX4200 Switches on page 31

• LCD Panel in EX4200 Switches on page 13

Management Port LEDs in EX4200 Switches

Themanagement port on EX4200 switches has two LEDs that indicate link/activity and

port status (see Figure 11 on page 24). Themanagement port is set to full-duplex and

the speed is set to 100Mbps.

Figure 11: LEDs on theManagement Port on an EX4200 Switch

Table 8 on page 24 describes the Link/Activity LED.

Table 8: Link/Activity LED on theManagement Port on EX4200 Switches

State and DescriptionColorLED

• Blinking—The port and the link are active, and there is linkactivity.

• On steadily—The port and the link are active, but there is nolink activity.

• Off—The port is not active.

GreenLink/Activity

Table 9 on page 25 describes the Status LED (administrative status).

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.24

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 49: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 9: Status LED on theManagement Port on EX4200 Switches

State and DescriptionColorLED

• On steadily—Administrative status is enabled.

• Off—Administrative status is disabled.

GreenStatus

RelatedDocumentation

See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 8 for port location.•

• ConnectinganEXSeriesSwitch toaNetwork forOut-of-BandManagementonpage 163

Power Supply in EX4200 Switches

The power supply in EX4200 switches is a hot-removable and hot-insertable

field-replaceable unit (FRU) that you can install on the rear panel without powering off

the switch or disrupting the switching function. EX4200 switches have an internal

redundant power supply, making the power supply in EX4200 switches fully redundant.

NOTE: This topic uses the term PoE to refer to both PoE and PoE+ unlessthere is a need to distinguish between the two.

EX4200 switches use power supplies that provides two DC output voltages: 12 V for

system and logic power and 48–51 V (or higher, to compensate for voltage drops along

the path from the power supplies to the RJ-45 connector) for PoE ports.

NOTE: After powering on the switch, wait for at least 60 seconds beforepowering it off. After powering off the switch, wait for at least 60 secondsbefore powering it back on.

After the switchhasbeenpoweredon, it can takeup to60seconds for statusindicators—suchasLEDsonthepowersupply,showchassiscommandoutput,

andmessages on the LCD panel—to indicate that the power supply isfunctioning normally. Ignore error indicators that might appear during thefirst 60 seconds.

NOTE: EX4200-24PX and EX4200-48PX switches do not support the 930W (EX-PWR-930-AC) or the 600W (EX-PWR-600-AC) AC power supplies

that are used in the EX4200-48P and the EX4200-24P switchmodels.EX4200-24PXandEX4200-48PXswitchesworkonlywith thepower supplylabeled EX-PWR2-930-AC. You can find the label on the top of the power

supply(see“RemovingaPowerSupply fromanEX4200Switch”onpage182).TheEX-PWR2-930-ACpowersupply is supportedacross theEX4200product

line.

25Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 2: Component Descriptions

Page 50: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

This topic describes:

• AC Power Supplies on page 26

• DC Power Supplies on page 27

• PoE Power Budget and AC Power Supplies on page 27

AC Power Supplies

The AC power supply for the switch is available in 320W, 600W, and 930Wmodels

(see Figure 12 on page 26 and Figure 13 on page 26). The exterior of the 600Wmodel is

identical to that of the 930Wmodel. The 320W power supply is flush with the chassis.

The 600W power supply and 930W power supply extend out of the chassis by 2.25 in.

The power cord retainer clips extendout of the power supply by 3 in. The number of ports

onwhichPoE is enableddetermines theminimumpower requirementsofdifferent switch

models.

Figure 12: 320WACPower Supply

Figure 13: 600Wand 930WACPower Supplies

To avoid electrical injury, follow instructions in Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200

Switch and Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 Switch or “Installing a Power

Supply in anEX4200Switch” onpage 144or “RemovingaPowerSupply fromanEX4200

Switch” on page 182 carefully.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.26

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 51: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

DC Power Supplies

The DC power supply for the switch is available in a 190Wmodel, with dual input feeds

for power resiliency (see Figure 14 on page 27).

NOTE: The DC power supply in the switch does not support Power overEthernet (PoE); you can use either an external power injector or anACpowersupply to supply power to PoE devices that you connect to the switch.

NOTE: TheDC power supply in the switch has four terminals labeled A+, B+,A–, andB– (seeFigure 14onpage27) for connectingDCpower source cableslabeled positive (+) and negative (–). The DC power supplies are shippedwith jumpers from A+ input to B+ input tied together and jumpers from A–input to B– input tied together.

NOTE: The A+ and B+ terminals are referred to as +RTN and A– and B–terminals are referred to as –48 V in “DC PowerWiring SequenceWarning”on page 248 and “DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines” on page 243.

Figure 14: DC Power Supply

To avoid electrical injury, follow instructions in Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200

Switch and Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 Switch or “Installing a Power

Supply in anEX4200Switch” onpage 144or “RemovingaPowerSupply fromanEX4200

Switch” on page 182 carefully.

PoE Power Budget and AC Power Supplies

ThePoE power budget for a PoE switchmodel is determined by the capacity of its power

supply. For EX4200 switches, the capacity of the power supply provided with a PoE

model is sufficient to supply eachPoE-capable portwith up to 15.4W in compliancewith

the IEEE802.3af PoE standard. Table 10onpage 28 lists theEX4200switchPoEmodels,

their power supply ratings, and the associated PoE power budgets.

27Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 2: Component Descriptions

Page 52: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Starting with Junos OS Release 11.1, EX4200 switches support enhanced PoE, a Juniper

Networks extension to the IEEE 302.3af PoE standard. Enhanced PoE permits up to 18.6

W per PoE port. Because the power supply provided with a switch is designed to supply

a maximum of 15.4W per PoE port, if you connect a powered device that drawsmore

than 15.4W, the PoE power budget might not be sufficient to supply a full 15.4W to the

remaining PoE ports.

NOTE: Switches upgraded to Junos OS Release 11.1 from a previous releaserequireaseparateupgradeof thePoEcontroller software toenableenhancedPoE support.

EX4200-24PXandEX4200-48PXswitchessupportPoE+, the IEEE802.3atPoEstandard,

and permit up to 30W per port.

Table 10: Power Supply Rating and PoE Power Budget for EX4200 SwitchModels

PoE Power BudgetPower Supply RatingNumber of PoE-enabledPortsSwitch Model Number

130W320W8EX4200-24T

130W320W8EX4200-48T

410W600W24EX4200-24P

740W930W48EX4200-48P

740W930W24EX4200-24PX

740W930W48EX4200-48PX

RelatedDocumentation

AC Power Cord Specifications for EX4200 Switches on page 108•

• AC Power Supply LEDs in EX4200 Switches on page 29

• DC Power Supply LEDs in EX4200 Switches on page 29

• Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 8

• Field-Replaceable Units in EX4200 Switches on page 18

• Power Specifications for EX4200 Switches on page 107

• Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 238

• Connecting AC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 158

• Connecting DC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 160

• Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 153

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.28

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 53: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

AC Power Supply LEDs in EX4200 Switches

The AC power supply is installed on the rear panel of the switch. Table 11 on page 29

describes the LEDs on the AC power supplies.

Table 11: AC Power Supply LEDs

State and DescriptionLED

• Off—Disconnected from power or power is not coming intothe power supply.

• On—Power is coming into the power supply.

AC OK

• Off—Power supply is not sending out power correctly.

• On—Power supply is sending out power correctly.

DC OK

NOTE: If the ACOK LED and the DCOK LED are unlit, either the AC power

cord is not installed properly or the power supply fuse has failed. If the AC

OK LED is lit and the DCOK LED is unlit, the AC power supply is not installed

properly or the power supply has an internal failure.

RelatedDocumentation

Power Supply in EX4200 Switches on page 25•

• Connecting AC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 158

DC Power Supply LEDs in EX4200 Switches

The DC power supply is installed on the rear panel of the switch. Table 12 on page 29

describes the LEDs on the DC power supplies.

Table 12: DC Power Supply LEDs

DescriptionColorLED Label

Inputs A and B are normal, but there is no output.RedLED A

RedLED B

Inputs A and B are normal; output is normal.GreenLED A

GreenLED B

Input A has failed because the power supply fuse has failed,input voltage is low, or there is a loose connection; output isnormal.

Flash RedLED A

GreenLED B

29Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 2: Component Descriptions

Page 54: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 12: DC Power Supply LEDs (continued)

DescriptionColorLED Label

Input B has failed because the power supply fuse has failed,input voltage is low, or there is a loose connection; output isnormal.

GreenLED A

Flash RedLED B

Both inputs have failed because the power supply fuse hasfailed, input voltage is low, or there is a loose connection;output is normal.

Flash RedLED A

Flash RedLED B

There is no input; there is no output.OffLED A

OffLED B

RelatedDocumentation

Power Supply in EX4200 Switches on page 25•

• Connecting DC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 160

Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch

The cooling system in an EX4200 switch consists of a field-replaceable unit (FRU) fan

tray with three fans (see Figure 15 on page 30). The fan tray is located at the rear of the

chassis and provides side-to-rear chassis cooling (see Figure 16 on page 31).

Figure 15: Fan Tray Used in an EX4200 Switch

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.30

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 55: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Figure 16: Airflow Through the EX4200 Switch Chassis

The fan tray used in an EX4200 switch comes with load-sharing redundancy that can

tolerate a single fan failure at room temperature (below 45° C/113° F) to still provide

sufficient cooling.

Temperature sensors in the chassis monitor the temperature within the chassis. The

system raises an alarm if the fan fails or if the temperature inside the chassis rises above

permitted levels. If the temperature inside the chassis rises above the threshold, the

system shuts down automatically and the temperature shutdown LED on the rear panel

is lit. You can see the status of fans and the temperature from the Show Environment

Status option in the Status menu in the LCD panel.

RelatedDocumentation

Field-Replaceable Units in EX4200 Switches on page 18•

• Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 8

• Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 238

• Installing a Fan Tray in an EX4200 Switch on page 146

• Removing a Fan Tray from an EX4200 Switch on page 183

Uplink Modules in EX4200 Switches

EX4200 switches support three types of uplink modules:

• SFPuplinkmodule—Provides fourports for 1-gigabit small form-factorpluggable (SFP)

transceivers.

• SFP+ uplink module—Provides two ports for 10-gigabit small form-factor pluggable

(SFP+) transceivers when configured to operate in 10-gigabit mode or four ports for

31Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 2: Component Descriptions

Page 56: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

1-gigabit small form-factor pluggable (SFP) transceivers when configured to operate

in 1-gigabit mode.

• XFP uplink module—Provides two ports for 10-gigabit small form-factor pluggable

(XFP) transceivers.

NOTE: When a new uplink module is installed in the switch or an existinguplink module is replaced with another uplink module, the switch detectsthe newly installed uplinkmodule. The switch creates the required interfacesif the uplink module has transceivers in its ports and when new transceiversare installed in those ports.

When connecting uplink module ports, you can install an SFP uplink module at one end

of theconnectionand install anSFP+uplinkmodule configured tooperate in the 1-gigabit

mode at the other end. Likewise, you can install an XFP uplink module at one end of the

connection and install an SFP+ uplink module configured to operate in the 10-gigabit

mode at the other end.

This topic describes:

• SFP Uplink Module on page 32

• SFP+ Uplink Module on page 33

• XFP Uplink Module on page 34

SFPUplink Module

Figure 17 on page 32 shows theSFPuplinkmodule, which provides four ports for 1-gigabit

SFP transceivers.

Figure 17: SFP Uplink Module

SFP uplink modules are shipped with dust covers preinstalled in the ports.

The SFP uplink module requires Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.0 or later.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.32

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 57: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

SFP+Uplink Module

SFP+ uplinkmodules can be used for either SFP+ or SFP transceivers. You configure the

operating mode on themodule to match the type of transceiver you want to use—for

SFP+ transceivers, youconfigure the 10-gigabit operatingmode, and forSFP transceivers,

you configure the 1-gigabit operating mode. See Setting the Mode on an SFP+ Uplink

Module (CLI Procedure).

By default, the SFP+ uplink module operates in the 10-gigabit mode and supports only

SFP+ transceivers. If you have not changed themodule from the default setting and you

want to use SFP+ transceivers, you do not need to configure the operating mode.

If the operatingmode and the configuredmode for an SFP+ uplinkmodule are different,

it is shown in the output of show chassis pic fpc-slot slot number pic-slot 1.

Figure 18 on page 33 shows the SFP+ uplink module.

Figure 18: SFP+ Uplink Module

Transceivers are supported in the uplink module’s ports as follows:

• SFP+ transceivers are supported in ports 0 and 2.

• SFP transceivers are supported in all four ports.

The ports that support SFP+ transceivers are labeled 10 G on the uplink module’s

faceplate (see Figure 18 on page 33).

33Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 2: Component Descriptions

Page 58: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

NOTE: When an SFP+ uplink module is operating in 10-gigabit mode:

• Only the 10-gigabit ports (ports 0 and 2) are enabled.

• You can use only SFP+ transceivers in those ports.

When an SFP+ uplink module is operating in 1-gigabit mode:

• All four ports are enabled.

• You can use only SFP transceivers in all four ports.

The SFP+ uplink module has an LED on the faceplate (labeled Operating mode LED in

Figure 18 onpage 33) that indicates the operatingmode. If the uplinkmodule is operating

in the 10-gigabit mode, the LED is lit. If the uplink module is operating in the 1-gigabit

mode, the LED is unlit.

SFP+ uplink modules are shipped with dust covers preinstalled in the ports.

The SFP+ uplink module requires Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.4 or later.

XFPUplink Module

Figure 19onpage34shows theXFPuplinkmodule,whichprovides twoports for 10-gigabit

XFP transceivers.

Figure 19: XFP Uplink Module

g020

108

Link/ActivityLED

Link/ActivityLED

Status LED Status LED

Port 0 Port 1

XFP uplink modules are shipped with a dust cover preinstalled in one port.

The XFP uplink module requires Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.0 or later.

RelatedDocumentation

• Network Port LEDs in EX4200 Switches on page 20

• Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches on page 77

• Optical Interface Support in EX4200 Switches on page 42

• SFP+ Direct Attach Cables for EX Series Switches on page 70

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.34

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 59: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Example: Configuring Aggregated Ethernet High-Speed Uplinks Between an EX4200

Virtual Chassis Access Switch and an EX4200 Virtual Chassis Distribution Switch

• Example: Configuring Aggregated Ethernet High-Speed Uplinks with LACP Between

an EX4200 Virtual Chassis Access Switch and an EX4200 Virtual Chassis Distribution

Switch

• Installing an Uplink Module in an EX4200 Switch on page 147

• Troubleshooting Virtual Chassis Port Connectivity on an EX4200 Switch on page 202

35Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 2: Component Descriptions

Page 60: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.36

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 61: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 3

Component Specifications

• USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch on page 37

• Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX4200 Switch on page 38

• Console Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX Series Switch on page 39

• RJ-45 toDB-9SerialPortAdapterPinout Information foranEXSeriesSwitchonpage40

• Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX4200 Switch on page 41

• Optical Interface Support in EX4200 Switches on page 42

• SFP+ Direct Attach Cables for EX Series Switches on page 70

• Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches on page 77

• Virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches on page 85

USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch

The following Juniper Networks USB flash drives have been tested and are officially

supported for the USB port on all EX Series switches:

• RE-USB-1G-S

• RE-USB-2G-S

• RE-USB-4G-S

CAUTION: Any USBmemory product not listed as supported for EX Seriesswitches has not been tested by Juniper Networks. The use of anyunsupported USBmemory product could expose your EX Series switch tounpredictablebehavior. JuniperNetworksTechnicalAssistanceCenter (JTAC)can provide only limited support for issues related to unsupported hardware.We strongly recommend that you use only supported USB flash drives.

All USB flash drives used on EX Series switches must have the following features:

• USB 2.0 or later.

• Formatted with a FAT or MS-DOS file system.

37Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 62: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• If the switch is running Junos OS Release 9.5 or earlier, the formatting methodmust

use amaster boot record. Microsoft Windows formatting, by default, does not use a

master boot record. See the documentation for your USB flash drive for information

on how your USB flash drive is formatted.

RelatedDocumentation

See EX2200 Switches Hardware Overview for port location.•

• See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch for port location.

• See Rear Panel of an EX3300 Switch for port location.

• See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 8 for port location.

• See Front Panel of an EX4500 Switch for port location.

• See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) Module in an EX6200 Switch for port

location.

• See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) Module in an EX8208 Switch for port

location.

• See Routing Engine (RE) Module in an EX8216 Switch for port location.

• Booting an EX Series Switch Using a Software Package Stored on a USB Flash Drive

Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX4200 Switch

A network port on the switch uses an RJ-45 connector to connect to a device.

The port uses an autosensing RJ-45 connector to support a 10/100/1000Base-T

connection. Two LEDs on the port indicate link/activity on the port and the port status.

SeeNetworkPort LEDs inEX3200Switchesand “NetworkPort LEDs inEX4200Switches”

on page 20.

Table 13 on page 38 provides the pinout information for the RJ-45 connector. An RJ-45

cable, with a connector attached, is supplied with the switch.

Table 13: Network Port Connector Pinout Information

DescriptionSignalPin

Transmit/receive data pair 1

Negative Vport (in PoEmodels)

TRP1+1

Transmit/receive data pair 1

Negative Vport (in PoEmodels)

TRP1-2

Transmit/receive data pair 2

Positive Vport (in PoEmodels)

TRP2+3

Transmit/receive data pair 3TRP3+4

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.38

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 63: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 13: Network Port Connector Pinout Information (continued)

DescriptionSignalPin

Transmit/receive data pair 3TRP3-5

Transmit/receive data pair 2

Positive Vport (in PoEmodels)

TRP2-6

Transmit/receive data pair 4TRP4+7

Transmit/receive data pair 4TRP4-8

RelatedDocumentation

Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 7•

Console Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX Series Switch

The console port on an EX Series switch is an RS-232 serial interface that uses an RJ-45

connector to connect to a console management device. The default baud rate for the

console port is 9600 baud.

Table 14 on page 39 provides the pinout information for the RJ-45 console connector.

An RJ-45 cable and an RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter are supplied with the switch.

NOTE: If your laptopor PCdoes not have aDB-9male connector pin and youwant to connect your laptop or PC directly to an EX Series switch, use acombination of the RJ-45 to DB-9 female adapter supplied with the switchand a USB to DB-9male adapter. Youmust provide the USB to DB-9maleadapter.

Table 14: EX Series Switches Console Port Connector Pinout Information

DescriptionSignalPin

Request to sendRTS Output1

Data terminal readyDTR Output2

Transmit dataTxD Output3

Signal groundSignal Ground4

Signal groundSignal Ground5

Receive dataRxD Input6

Data carrier detectCD Input7

39Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 64: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 14: EX Series Switches Console Port Connector Pinout Information (continued)

DescriptionSignalPin

Clear to sendCTS Input8

RelatedDocumentation

See EX2200 Switches Hardware Overview for port location.•

• See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch for port location.

• See Rear Panel of an EX3300 Switch for port location.

• See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 8 for port location.

• See Front Panel of an EX4500 Switch for port location.

• See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) Module in an EX6200 Switch for port

location.

• See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) Module in an EX8208 Switch for port

location.

• See Routing Engine (RE) Module in an EX8216 Switch for port location.

• Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console on page 165

• Configuring the Console Port Type (CLI Procedure)

RJ-45 to DB-9 Serial Port Adapter Pinout Information for an EX Series Switch

The console port on an EX Series switch is an RS-232 serial interface that uses an RJ-45

connector to connect to amanagement device such as a PC or a laptop. If your laptop

or PC does not have a DB-9male connector pin and you want to connect your laptop or

PC to an EX Series switch, use a combination of the RJ-45 to DB-9 female adapter

supplied with the switch along with a USB to DB-9male adapter.

Table 15 on page 40 provides the pinout information for the RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port

adapter.

Table 15: EX Series Switches RJ-45 to DB-9 Serial Port Adapter Pinout Information

SignalDB-9 PinSignalRJ-45 Pin

CTS8RTS1

DSR6DTR2

RXD2TXD3

GND5GND4

TXD3RXD6

DTR4DSR7

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.40

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 65: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 15: EXSeries SwitchesRJ-45 toDB-9Serial Port Adapter Pinout Information (continued)

SignalDB-9 PinSignalRJ-45 Pin

RTS7CTS8

RelatedDocumentation

Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console on page 165•

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 173

Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX4200 Switch

Themanagement port on the switch uses an RJ-45 connector to connect to a

management device for out-of-bandmanagement.

The port uses an autosensing RJ-45 connector to support a 10/100/1000Base-T

connection. TwoLEDson theport indicate link/activity on theport and theadministrative

status of the port. See Management Port LEDs in EX3200 Switches and “Management

Port LEDs in EX4200 Switches” on page 24.

Table 16 on page 41 provides the pinout information of the RJ-45 connector. An RJ-45

cable, with a connector attached, is supplied with the switch.

Table 16: Management Port Connector Pinout Information

DescriptionSignalPin

Transmit/receive data pair 1TRP1+1

Transmit/receive data pair 1TRP1-2

Transmit/receive data pair 2TRP2+3

Transmit/receive data pair 3TRP3+4

Transmit/receive data pair 3TRP3-5

Transmit/receive data pair 2TRP2-6

Transmit/receive data pair 4TRP4+7

Transmit/receive data pair 4TRP4-8

RelatedDocumentation

See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 8 for port location.•

• ConnectinganEXSeriesSwitch toaNetwork forOut-of-BandManagementonpage 163

41Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 66: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Optical Interface Support in EX4200 Switches

Optional uplink modules for EX4200 switches support SFP, SFP+, or XFP transceivers.

This topic describes the optical interfaces supported for those transceivers. It also lists

the copper interface supported for the SFP transceivers.

NOTE: Use only optical transceivers and optical connectors purchased fromJuniper Networks for your EX Series switches.

TheGigabit EthernetSFP,SFP+,orXFP transceivers installed inEX4200switches support

digital opticalmonitoring (DOM):Youcanviewthediagnosticdetails for these transceivers

by issuing the operational mode CLI command show interfaces diagnostics optics.

The tables in this topicdescribe theoptical interface support over single-mode fiber-optic

(SMF) andmultimode fiber-optic (MMF) cables for SFP, SFP+, and XFP transceivers

and over the copper interface for SFP transceivers:

• Table 17onpage43—Optical interfacesupportandcopper interfacesupport forGigabit

Ethernet SFP transceivers.

• Table 18 on page 55—Optical interface support for Fast Ethernet SFP transceivers.

• Table 19 on page 61—Optical interface support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ transceivers.

• Table 20 on page 66—Optical interface support for Gigabit Ethernet XFP transceivers.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.42

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 67: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 17: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFPTransceivers

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-1GE-TModel Number1000BASE-T

10/100/1000MbpsRate

RJ-45Connector Type

CopperFiber Count

–Transmitter Wavelength

–Minimum Launch Power

–Maximum Launch Power

–Minimum Receiver Sensitivity

–Maximum Input Power

CopperFiber Type

–Core/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

100m (328 ft)Distance

Not availableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.0 or laterSoftware Required

43Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 68: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 17: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFPTransceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-1GE-SXModel Number1000BASE-SX

1000MbpsRate

LCConnector Type

DualFiber Count

850 nmTransmitter Wavelength

–9.5 dBmMinimum Launch Power

–3 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–21 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

0 dBmMaximum Input Power

MMFFiber Type

50/125 µm50/125 µm62.5/125 µm62.5/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

OM2–OM1FDDIFiber Grade

500MHz/km400MHz/km200MHz/km160MHz/kmModal Bandwidth

550m(1804 ft)

500m(1640 ft)

275m(902 ft)

220m(722 ft)

Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.0 or laterSoftware Required

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.44

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 69: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 17: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFPTransceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-1GE-LXModel Number1000BASE-LX

1000MbpsRate

LCConnector Type

DualFiber Count

1310 nmTransmitter Wavelength

–9.5 dBmMinimum Launch Power

–3 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–25 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–3 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

10 km (6.2 miles)Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.0 or laterSoftware Required

45Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 70: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 17: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFPTransceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-GE10KT13R14Model Number1000BASE-BX-U

1000MbpsRate

LCConnector Type

SingleFiber Count

1310 nmTransmitter Wavelength

1490 nmReceiver Wavelength

–9 dBmMinimum Launch Power

–3 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–30 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–3 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

10 km (6.2 miles)Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.4 or laterSoftware Required

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.46

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 71: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 17: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFPTransceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-GE10KT14R13Model Number1000BASE-BX-D

1000MbpsRate

LCConnector Type

SingleFiber Count

1490 nmTransmitter Wavelength

1310 nmReceiver Wavelength

–9 dBmMinimum Launch Power

–3 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–30 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–3 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

10 km (6.2 miles)Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.4 or laterSoftware Required

47Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 72: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 17: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFPTransceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-GE10KT13R15Model Number1000BASE-BX-U

1000MbpsRate

LCConnector Type

SingleFiber Count

1310 nmTransmitter Wavelength

1550 nmReceiver Wavelength

–9 dBmMinimum Launch Power

–3 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–3 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–21 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

10 km (6.2 miles)Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.5 or laterSoftware Required

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.48

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 73: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 17: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFPTransceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-GE10KT15R13Model Number1000BASE-BX-D

1000MbpsRate

LCConnector Type

SingleFiber Count

1550 nmTransmitter Wavelength

1310 nmReceiver Wavelength

–9 dBmMinimum Launch Power

–3 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–3 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–21 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

10 km (6.2 miles)Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.5 or laterSoftware Required

49Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 74: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 17: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFPTransceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-GE40KT13R15Model Number1000BASE-BX-U

1000MbpsRate

LCConnector Type

SingleFiber Count

1310 nmTransmitter Wavelength

1550 nmReceiver Wavelength

–6.5 dBmMinimum Launch Power

2 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–3 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–23 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

40 km (24.8 miles)Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.5 or laterSoftware Required

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.50

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 75: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 17: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFPTransceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-GE40KT15R13Model Number1000BASE-BX-D

1000MbpsRate

LCConnector Type

SingleFiber Count

1550 nmTransmitter Wavelength

1310 nmReceiver Wavelength

–6.5 dBmMinimum Launch Power

2 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–3 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–23 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

40 km (24.8 miles)Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.5 or laterSoftware Required

51Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 76: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 17: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFPTransceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-1GE-LX40KModel Number1000BASE-LX

1000MbpsRate

LCConnector Type

DoubleFiber Count

1310 nmTransmitter Wavelength

–14 dBmMinimum Launch Power

–8 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–45 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–3 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

40 km (24.8 miles)Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.4 or laterSoftware Required

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.52

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 77: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 17: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFPTransceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-1GE-LHModel Number1000BASE-LH (or1000BASE-ZX)

1000MbpsRate

LCConnector Type

DualFiber Count

1550 nmTransmitter Wavelength

–2 dBmMinimum Launch Power

5 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–25 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–3 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

70 km (43.5 miles)Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.0 or laterSoftware Required

53Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 78: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 17: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFPTransceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

SFP-1G-CWDM-LHModel Number1000BASE-LX

1000MbpsRate

LCConnector Type

SingleFiber Count

1470 nm through 1610 nm (spaced 20 nm)Transmitter Wavelength

0 dBmMinimum Launch Power

5 dBmMaximum Launch Power

-32 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–8 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

80 km (49.7 miles)Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 12.1 or laterSoftware Required

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.54

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 79: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 18: Optical Interface Support for Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-1FE-FXModel Number100BASE-FX

100MbpsRate

LCConnector Type

DualFiber Count

1310 nmTransmitter Wavelength

–20 dBmMinimum Launch Power

–14 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–32.5 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–8 dBmMaximum Input Power

MMFFiber Type

62.5/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

FDDI/OM1Fiber Grade

500MHz/kmModal Bandwidth

2 km (1.2 miles)Distance

Not availableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.2 or laterSoftware Required

55Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 80: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 18: Optical Interface Support for Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-1FE-LXModel Number100BASE-LX

100MbpsRate

LCConnector Type

DualFiber Count

1310 nmTransmitter Wavelength

–15 dBmMinimum Launch Power

–8 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–31.5 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–8 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

10 km (6.2 miles)Distance

Not availableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.5 or laterSoftware Required

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.56

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 81: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 18: Optical Interface Support for Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-FE20KT13R15Model Number100BASE-BX-U

100MbpsRate

LCConnector Type

SingleFiber Count

1310 nmTransmitter Wavelength

1550 nmReceiver Wavelength

–14 dBmMinimum Launch Power

–8 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–45 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–8 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

20 km (12.4 miles)Distance

Not availableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.3 or laterSoftware Required

57Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 82: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 18: Optical Interface Support for Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-FE20KT15R13Model Number100BASE-BX-D

100MbpsRate

LCConnector Type

SingleFiber Count

1550 nmTransmitter Wavelength

1310 nmReceiver Wavelength

–14 dBmMinimum Launch Power

–8 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–45 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–8 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

20 km (12.4 miles)Distance

Not availableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.3 or laterSoftware Required

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.58

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 83: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 18: Optical Interface Support for Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-1FE-LX40KModel Number100BASE-LX40K

100MbpsRate

LCConnector Type

DualFiber Count

1310 nmTransmitter Wavelength

–5 dBmMinimum Launch Power

0 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–32 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–8 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

40 km (24.8 miles)Distance

Not availableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 10.0 or laterSoftware Required

59Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 84: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 18: Optical Interface Support for Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-1FE-LHModel Number100BASE-LH (or100BASE-ZX)

100MbpsRate

LCConnector Type

DualFiber Count

1310 nmTransmitter Wavelength

–5 dBmMinimum Launch Power

0 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–32 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–8 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

80 km (49.7 miles)Distance

Not availableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 10.0 or laterSoftware Required

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.60

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 85: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 19: Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ Transceivers

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-10GE-USRModel Number10GBASE-SR

10 GbpsRate

LCConnector Type

DualFiber Count

850 nmTransmitter Wavelength

–7.3 dBmMinimum Launch Power

–1.3 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–11.1 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–9.9 dBmMaximum Input Power

MMFFiber Type

50/125µm50/125µm

62.5/125µm

Core/Cladding Size

OM3OM3OM1Fiber Grade

1500MHz/km

500MHz/km

200MHz/km

Modal Bandwidth

100m(328 ft)

30m(98.4 ft)

10 m(32.8 ft)

Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 10.2 or laterSoftware Required

61Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 86: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 19: Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ Transceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-10GE-SRModel Number10GBASE-SR

10 GbpsRate

LCConnector Type

DualFiber Count

850 nmTransmitter Wavelength

–7.3 dBmMinimum Launch Power

–1 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–9.9 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–1 dBmMaximum Input Power

MMFFiber Type

50/125µm50/125µm

50/125µm62.5/125µm

62.5/125µm

Core/Cladding Size

OM3OM2–OM1FDDIFiber Grade

1500MHz/km

500MHz/km

400MHz/km

200MHz/km

160MHz/km

Modal Bandwidth

300m(984 ft)

82m(269 ft)

66m(216 ft)

33 m(108 ft)

26m(85 ft)

Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.4 or laterSoftware Required

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.62

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 87: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 19: Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ Transceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-10GE-LRMModel Number10GBASE-LRM

10 GbpsRate

LCConnector Type

DualFiber Count

1310 nmTransmitter Wavelength

–6.5 dBmMinimum Launch Power

0.5 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–21 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

0.5 dBmMaximum Input Power

MMFFiber Type

50/125µm50/125µm62.5/125µmCore/Cladding Size

OM3OM2FDDI/OM1Fiber Grade

500MHz/km

500MHz/km

500MHz/km

Modal Bandwidth

220m(722 ft)

220m(722 ft)

220m(722 ft)

Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.5 or laterSoftware Required

63Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 88: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 19: Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ Transceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-10GE-LRModel Number10GBASE-LR

10 GbpsRate

LCConnector Type

DualFiber Count

1310 nmTransmitter Wavelength

–8.2 dBmMinimum Launch Power

0.5 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–18 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

0.5 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

10 km (6.2 miles)Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.4 or laterSoftware Required

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.64

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 89: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 19: Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ Transceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-SFP-10GE-ERModel Number10GBASE-ER

10 GbpsRate

LCConnector Type

DualFiber Count

1550 nmTransmitter Wavelength

–4.7 dBmMinimum Launch Power

4 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–15.8 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–1 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

40 km (24.8 miles)Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 10.3 or laterSoftware Required

65Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 90: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 20: Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet XFP Transceivers

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-XFP-10GE-SRModel Number10GBASE-SR

10 GbpsRate

LCConnector Type

DualFiber Count

850 nmTransmitter Wavelength

–7.3 dBmMinimum Launch Power

–1.3 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–11.1 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–1 dBmMaximum Input Power

MMFFiber Type

50/125µm50/125µm

50/125µm62.5/125µm

62.5/125µm

Core/Cladding Size

OM3OM2–OM1FDDIFiber Grade

1500MHz/km

500MHz/km

400MHz/km

200MHz/km

160MHz/km

Modal Bandwidth

300m(984 ft)

82m(269 ft)

66m(216 ft)

33 m(108 ft)

26m(85 ft)

Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.0 or laterSoftware Required

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.66

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 91: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 20: Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet XFP Transceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-XFP-10GE-LRModel Number10GBASE-LR

10 GbpsRate

LCConnector Type

DualFiber Count

1310 nmTransmitter Wavelength

–8.2 dBmMinimum Launch Power

1 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–18 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

0.5 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

10 km (6.2 miles)Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.0 or laterSoftware Required

67Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 92: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 20: Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet XFP Transceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-XFP-10GE-ERModel Number10GBASE-ER

10 GbpsRate

LCConnector Type

DualFiber Count

1550 nmTransmitter Wavelength

–4.7 dBmMinimum Launch Power

2 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–15.8 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–1 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

40 km (24.8 miles)Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.0 or laterSoftware Required

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.68

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 93: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 20: Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet XFP Transceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

EX-XFP-10GE-ZRModel Number10GBASE-ZR

10 GbpsRate

LCConnector Type

DualFiber Count

1550 nmTransmitter Wavelength

0Minimum Launch Power

4 dBmMaximum Launch Power

–30 dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–7 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

80 km (49.7 miles)Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.0 or laterSoftware Required

69Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 94: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 20: Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet XFP Transceivers (continued)

ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard

XFP-10G-T-DWDM-ZRModel Number10GBASE-ZR

10 GbpsRate

LCConnector Type

DualFiber Count

Tunable (1528 nm through 1563 nm)Transmitter Wavelength

-1dBmMinimum Launch Power

+3dBmMaximum Launch Power

-24dBmMinimum Receiver Sensitivity

–1 dBmMaximum Input Power

SMFFiber Type

9/125 µmCore/Cladding Size

–Modal Bandwidth

80 km (24.8 miles)Distance

AvailableDOM Support

Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 12.1 or laterSoftware Required

RelatedDocumentation

Uplink Modules in EX4200 Switches on page 31•

• Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 149

• Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 187

SFP+ Direct Attach Cables for EX Series Switches

Small form-factor pluggable plus transceiver (SFP+) direct attach copper cables, also

known as Twinax cables, are suitable for in-rack connections between servers and

switches. They are suitable for short distances up to 7 m, making them ideal for highly

cost-effective networking connectivity within a rack and between adjacent racks.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.70

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 95: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

This topic describes:

• Cable Specifications on page 71

• Standards Supported by These Cables on page 76

Cable Specifications

EX Series switches support the following SFP+ direct attach cables:

• SFP+ active direct attach—The active Twinax cable has active electronic components

in the SFP+ housing to improve the signal quality. EX Series switches support 1 m, 3m,

and 5m long SFP+ active direct attach cables.

• SFP+passive direct attach—ThepassiveTwinax cable is a straight cablewith noactive

electronic components. EX Series switches support 1 m, 3 m, 5 m, and 7m long SFP+

passive direct attach cables.

Table 21 on page 71 and Table 22 on page 71 describe the support for SFP+ active and

passive direct attach cable lengths on EX Series switches for Junos OS releases:

Table 21: Software Support for SFP+ Active Direct Attach Cables for EX Series Switches

Cable LengthSoftware Support AddedSwitch

1 m, 3 m, and 5mJunos OS Release 12.1EX3200 switches

1 m, 3 m, and 5mJunos OS Release 12.1EX3300 switches

1 m, 3 m, and 5mJunos OS Release 12.1EX4200 switches

1 m, 3 m, and 5mJunos OS Release 12.1EX4500 switches

1 m, 3 m, and 5mJunos OS Release 12.1EX6200 switches

1 m, 3 m, and 5mJunos OS Release 12.1EX8200 switches

Table 22: Software Support for SFP+ Passive Direct Attach Cables for EX Series Switches

Cable LengthSoftware Support AddedSwitch

1 m, 3 m, 5 m, and 7mJunos OS Release 10.3EX3200 switches

1 m and 7mJunos OS Release 11.3EX3300 switches

1 m, 3 m, 5 m, and 7mJunos OS Release 10.3EX4200 switches

1 m, 3 m, and 7mJunos OS Release 10.2EX4500 switches

5mJunos OS Release 11.2

71Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 96: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 22: Software Support for SFP+ Passive Direct Attach Cables for EX SeriesSwitches (continued)

Cable LengthSoftware Support AddedSwitch

1 m, 3 m, and 7mJunos OS Release 10.0EX8200 8-port SFP+ line cards(EX8200-8XS)

5mJunos OS Release 10.3

1 m, 3 m, and 7mJunos OS Release 10.3EX8200 40-port SFP+ line cards(EX8200-40XS)

5mJunos OS Release 11.1

NOTE: Werecommendthatyouuseonly JuniperNetworksSFP+directattachcables with your EX Series switches.

The cables are hot-removable and hot-insertable: You can remove and replace them

without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions. A cable comprises a

low-voltage cable assembly that connects directly into two SFP+ ports, one at each end

of the cable. The cables use high-performance integrated duplex serial data links for

bidirectional communication and are designed for data rates up to 10 Gbps.

Table 23 on page 73 describes the cable specifications.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.72

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 97: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 23: SFP+ Direct Attach Cable Specifications

ValueSpecificationModel

10 Gbps full-duplex serial transmissionRateEX-SFP-10GE-DAC-1m

SFP+ passive Twinax cable assemblyConnector type

3.3 VSupply voltage

0.57WPower consumption (per end)

-40°C through 85°CStorage temperature

TwinaxCable type

30 AWGWire AWG

1 in.Minimum cable bend radius

100 ohmsCable characteristic impedance

2%maximumCrosstalk between pairs

1.31 nsec/ftTime delay

3.3 ft (1 m)Length

10 Gbps full-duplex serial transmissionRateEX-SFP-10GE-DAC-3m

SFP+ passive Twinax cable assemblyConnector type

3.3 VSupply voltage

0.57WPower consumption (per end)

-40°C through 85°CStorage temperature

TwinaxCable type

30 AWGWire AWG

1 in.Minimum cable bend radius

100 ohmsCable characteristic impedance

2%maximumCrosstalk between pairs

1.31 nsec/ftTime delay

9.9 ft (3 m)Length

73Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 98: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 23: SFP+ Direct Attach Cable Specifications (continued)

ValueSpecificationModel

10 Gbps full-duplex serial transmissionRateEX-SFP-10GE-DAC-5m

SFP+ passive Twinax cable assemblyConnector type

3.3 VSupply voltage

0.57WPower consumption (per end)

-40°C through 85°CStorage temperature

TwinaxCable type

24 AWGWire AWG

1 in.Minimum cable bend radius

100 ohmsCable characteristic impedance

2%maximumCrosstalk between pairs

1.31 nsec/ftTime delay

16.4 ft (5 m)Length

10 Gbps full-duplex serial transmissionRateEX-SFP-10GE-DAC-7m

SFP+ passive Twinax cable assemblyConnector type

3.3 VSupply voltage

0.57WPower consumption (per end)

-40°C through 85°CStorage temperature

TwinaxCable type

24 AWGWire AWG

1 in.Minimum cable bend radius

100 ohmsCable characteristic impedance

2%maximumCrosstalk between pairs

1.31 nsec/ftTime delay

23 ft (7 m)Length

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.74

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 99: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 23: SFP+ Direct Attach Cable Specifications (continued)

ValueSpecificationModel

10 Gbps full-duplex serial transmissionRateEX-SFP-10GE-ACT-1M

SFP+ active Twinax cable assemblyConnector type

3.3 VSupply voltage

0.57WPower consumption (per end)

-40°C through 85°CStorage temperature

TwinaxCable type

24 AWGWire AWG

1 in.Minimum cable bend radius

100 ohmsCable characteristic impedance

2%maximumCrosstalk between pairs

1.31 nsec/ftTime delay

3.3 ft (1 m)Length

10 Gbps full-duplex serial transmissionRateEX-SFP-10GE-ACT-3M

SFP+ active Twinax cable assemblyConnector type

3.3 VSupply voltage

0.57WPower consumption (per end)

-40°C through 85°CStorage temperature

TwinaxCable type

24 AWGWire AWG

1 in.Minimum cable bend radius

100 ohmsCable characteristic impedance

2%maximumCrosstalk between pairs

1.31 nsec/ftTime delay

9.9 ft (3 m)Length

75Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 100: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 23: SFP+ Direct Attach Cable Specifications (continued)

ValueSpecificationModel

10 Gbps full-duplex serial transmissionRateEX-SFP-10GE-ACT-5M

SFP+ active Twinax cable assemblyConnector type

3.3 VSupply voltage

0.57WPower consumption (per end)

-40°C through 85°CStorage temperature

TwinaxCable type

24 AWGWire AWG

1 in.Minimum cable bend radius

100 ohmsCable characteristic impedance

2%maximumCrosstalk between pairs

1.31 nsec/ftTime delay

16.4 ft (5 m)Length

Standards Supported by These Cables

The cables comply with the following standards:

• SFPmechanical standard SFF-843—see ftp://ftp.seagate.com/sff/SFF-8431.PDF.

• Electrical interface standard SFF-8432—see ftp://ftp.seagate.com/sff/SFF-8432.PDF.

• SFP+Multi-Source Alliance (MSA) standards

RelatedDocumentation

Optical Interface Support in EX3200 Switches•

• Optical Interface Support in EX3300 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX4200 Switches on page 42

• Optical Interface Support in EX4500 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX8200 Switches

• Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 149

• Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 187

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.76

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 101: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches

EX4200 switches have a field-replaceable unit (FRU) uplink module on the front panel.

Table 24 on page 77 provides the uplink modules connector pinout information.

NOTE: You can use these ports to connect an access switch to a distributionswitch. You can also use optional uplink module ports to connect membersof a Virtual Chassis acrossmultiple wiring closets.

Table 24: Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information

Pin NamePin Number

GNDA1

GNDA2

GNDA3

GNDA4

GNDA5

GNDA6

GNDA7

GNDA8

GNDA9

GNDA10

GNDA11

GNDA12

GNDA13

GNDA14

Uplink_I2C_SCKA15

GNDA16

Uplink_PDA17

GNDA18

77Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 102: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 24: Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information (continued)

Pin NamePin Number

POWER (12V)A19

GNDA20

GNDB1

XAUI0_RX0NB2

GNDB3

XAUI0_RX2NB4

Uplink_P25_LED2B5

XAUI1_RX0NB6

Uplink_P27_LED2B7

XAUI1_RX2NB8

GNDB9

SRX28NB10

Uplink_XAUI_XMDIOB11

SRX26NB12

GNDB13

SGMIIRXNB14

Uplink_I2C_RstB15

Uplink_IntrB16

Uplink_Pwr_EnB17

Uplink_P26_LED0B18

POWER (12V)B19

POWER (12V)B20

GNDC1

XAUI0_RX0PC2

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.78

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 103: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 24: Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information (continued)

Pin NamePin Number

GNDC3

XAUI0_RX2PC4

GNDC5

XAUI1_RX0PC6

GNDC7

XAUI1_RX2PC8

GNDC9

SRX28PC10

GNDC11

SRX26PC12

GNDC13

SGMIIRXPC14

CPU_UPLINK_MDCC15

Uplink_I2C_SDAC16

CPU_UPLINK_MDIOC17

Uplink_P26_LED1C18

UPLNK_PWR_OKC19

POWER (12V)C20

GNDD1

GNDD2

XAUI0_TX1ND3

GNDD4

XAUI0_TX3ND5

GNDD6

79Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 104: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 24: Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information (continued)

Pin NamePin Number

XAUI1_TX1ND7

GNDD8

XAUI1_TX3ND9

GNDD10

STX27ND11

GNDD12

STX25ND13

GNDD14

Uplink_RstD15

GNDD16

Uplink_Status_LED0D17

GNDD18

POWER (12V)D19

GNDD20

GNDE1

XAUI0_TX0NE2

XAUI0_TX1PE3

XAUI0_TX2NE4

XAUI0_TX3PE5

XAUI1_TX0NE6

XAUI1_TX1PE7

XAUI1_TX2NE8

XAUI1_TX3PE9

STX28NE10

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.80

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 105: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 24: Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information (continued)

Pin NamePin Number

STX27PE11

STX26NE12

STX25PE13

SGMIITXNE14

Uplink_Hotswap_LEDE15

Uplink_Spare_IntrE16

Uplink_Status_LED1E17

Uplink_P27_LED0E18

POWER (12V)E19

POWER (12V)E20

GNDF1

XAUI0_TX0PF2

GNDF3

XAUI0_TX2PF4

GNDF5

XAUI1_TX0PF6

GNDF7

XAUI_TX2PF8

GNDF9

STX28PF10

GNDF11

STX26PF12

GNDF13

SGMIITXPF14

81Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 106: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 24: Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information (continued)

Pin NamePin Number

GNDF15

Uplink_Expander_IntrF16

GNDF17

Uplink_P27_LED1F18

GNDF19

POWER (12V)F20

GNDG1

GNDG2

XAUI0_RX1NG3

GNDG4

XAUI0_RX3NG5

GNDG6

XAUI1_RX1NG7

GNDG8

XAUI1_RX3NG9

GNDG10

SRX27NG11

GNDG12

SRX25NG13

GNDG14

GNDG15

GNDG16

Uplink_P25_LED0G17

GNDG18

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.82

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 107: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 24: Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information (continued)

Pin NamePin Number

POWER (12V)G19

GNDG20

Uplink_PD_LoopbackH1

GNDH2

XAUI0_RX1PH3

GNDH4

XAUI0_RX3PH5

Uplink_P26_ LED2H6

XAUI1_RX1PH7

Uplink_P28_ LED2H8

XAUI1_RX3PH9

GNDH10

SRX27PH11

Uplink_XAUI_MDCH12

SRX25PH13

GNDH14

Serial_RXH15

GNDH16

Uplink_P25_LED1H17

Uplink_P28_LED0H18

POWER (12V)H19

POWER (12V)H20

GNDI1

GNDI2

83Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 108: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 24: Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information (continued)

Pin NamePin Number

GNDI3

GNDI4

GNDI5

GNDI6

GNDI7

GNDI8

GNDI9

GNDI10

GNDI11

GNDI12

GNDI13

GNDI14

GNDI15

Serial_TXI16

GNDI17

Uplink_P28_LED1I18

GNDI19

POWER (12V)I20

RelatedDocumentation

Uplink Modules in EX4200 Switches on page 31•

• Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 7

• Installing an Uplink Module in an EX4200 Switch on page 147

• Removing an Uplink Module from an EX4200 Switch on page 185

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.84

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 109: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches

EX4200switchesusea68-pinconnector cable to interconnect switches to formaVirtual

Chassis. The cable is provided with the switch. Table 25 on page 85 provides the Virtual

Chassis ports (VCPs) connector pinout information.

Table 25: Virtual Chassis Ports (VCPs) Connector Pinout Information

Pin NamePin Number

GNDA1

P1TXP0A2

P1TXN0A3

GNDA4

P1TXP1A5

P1TXN1A6

GNDA7

P1TXP2A8

P1TXN2A9

GNDA10

P1TXP3A11

P1TXN3A12

GNDA13

NCA14

NCA15

GNDA16

NCA17

NCA18

NCA19

NCA20

85Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 110: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 25: Virtual Chassis Ports (VCPs) Connector Pinout Information (continued)

Pin NamePin Number

NCA21

GNDA22

P2TXP0A23

P2TXN0A24

GNDA25

P2TXP1A26

P2TXN1A27

GNDA28

P2TXP2A29

P2TXN2A30

GNDA31

P2TXP3A32

P2TXN3A33

GNDA34

GNDB1

P1RXP0B2

P1RXN0B3

GNDB4

P1RXP1B5

P1RXN1B6

GNDB7

P1RXP2B8

P1RXN2B9

GNDB10

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.86

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 111: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 25: Virtual Chassis Ports (VCPs) Connector Pinout Information (continued)

Pin NamePin Number

P1RXP3B11

P1RXN3B12

GNDB13

NCB14

NCB15

NCB16

NCB17

NCB18

NCB19

NCB20

NCB21

GNDB22

P2RXP0B23

P2RXN0B24

GNDB25

P2RXP1B26

P2RXN1B27

GNDB28

P2RXP2B29

P2RXN2B30

GNDB31

P2RXP3B32

P2RXN3B33

GNDB34

87Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 3: Component Specifications

Page 112: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

RelatedDocumentation

• Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX4200 Switches on page 115

• Planning EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis on page 113

• Understanding EX3300, EX4200, and EX4500 Virtual Chassis Components

• Understanding EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis Hardware Configurations on

page 111

• Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch on page 151

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.88

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 113: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

PART 2

Planning for Switch Installation

• Site Preparation on page 91

• Mounting and Clearance Requirements on page 99

• Cable Specifications on page 105

• Planning Power Requirements on page 107

• Planning the Virtual Chassis on page 111

89Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 114: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.90

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 115: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 4

Site Preparation

• Site Preparation Checklist for EX4200 Switches on page 91

• General Site Guidelines on page 92

• Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines on page 93

• Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches on page 95

Site Preparation Checklist for EX4200 Switches

The checklist in Table 26 on page 91 summarizes the tasks you need to performwhen

preparing a site for EX4200 switch installation.

Table 26: Site Preparation Checklist

DatePerformed ByFor More InformationItem or Task

Environment

“Environmental Requirements andSpecifications forEXSeriesSwitches”on page 95

Verify that environmental factors such astemperatureandhumiditydonotexceedswitchtolerances.

Power

Measure distance between external powersources and switch installation site.

Locate sites for connection of systemgrounding.

“Power Specifications for EX4200Switches” on page 107

Calculate the power consumption andrequirements.

Hardware Configuration

“EX4200 Switches HardwareOverview” on page 3

Choose the number and types of switches youwant to install.

Rack or Cabinet

91Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 116: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 26: Site Preparation Checklist (continued)

DatePerformed ByFor More InformationItem or Task

“Rack Requirements for EX4200Switches” on page 99

“Cabinet Requirements for EX4200Switches” on page 100

Verify that your rack or cabinet meets theminimum requirements for the installation ofthe switch.

“Clearance Requirements for Airflowand Hardware Maintenance forEX4200 Switches” on page 102

Plan rackor cabinet location, including requiredspace clearances.

Secure the rack or cabinet to the floor andbuilding structure.

Wall

“Requirements for Mounting anEX4200SwitchonaDesktoporWall”on page 101

Verify that the wall meets the minimumrequirements for the installation of the switch.

“Clearance Requirements for Airflowand Hardware Maintenance forEX4200 Switches” on page 102

Verify that there is appropriate clearance in yourselected location.

Cables

Acquire cables and connectors:

• Determine the number of cables neededbased on your planned configuration.

• Review themaximum distance allowed foreachcable.Choose the lengthof cablebasedon the distance between the hardwarecomponents being connected.

Plan the cable routing andmanagement.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• General Site Guidelines on page 92

• Installing and Connecting an EX4200 Switch on page 127

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch on page 131

General Site Guidelines

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.92

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 117: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Efficient device operation requires proper site planning andmaintenance and proper

layout of the equipment, rack or cabinet (if used), and wiring closet.

To plan and create an acceptable operating environment for your device and prevent

environmentally caused equipment failures:

• Keep the area around the chassis free from dust and conductive material, such as

metal flakes.

• Followprescribedairflowguidelines toensure that thecoolingsystemfunctionsproperly

and that exhaust from other equipment does not blow into the intake vents of the

device.

• Follow the prescribed ESD prevention procedures to avoid damaging the equipment.

Static discharge can cause components to fail completely or intermittently over time.

• Install the device in a secure area, so that only authorized personnel can access the

device.

RelatedDocumentation

Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 238•

• Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches on page 95

• Environmental Requirements and Specifications for the QFX3100 Director Device

• Environmental Requirements andSpecifications for aQFX3008-I Interconnect Device

• Environmental Requirements and Specifications for the QFX3500 Device

Site ElectricalWiring Guidelines

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

Table 27 onpage94describes the factors youmust considerwhile planning the electrical

wiring at your site.

WARNING: It is particularly important to provide a properly grounded andshielded environment and to use electrical surge-suppression devices.

93Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 4: Site Preparation

Page 118: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 27: Site ElectricalWiring Guidelines

GuidelinesSiteWiring Factor

If your site experiences any of the following problems, consult experts in electrical surgesuppression and shielding:

• Improperly installed wires cause radio frequency interference (RFI).

• Damage from lightning strikes occurs when wires exceed recommended distances or passbetween buildings.

• Electromagnetic pulses (EMPs) caused by lightning damage unshielded conductors andelectronic devices.

Signaling limitations

To reduce or eliminate radio frequency interference (RFI) from your site wiring, do the following:

• Use twisted-pair cable with a good distribution of grounding conductors.

• If you must exceed the recommended distances, use a high-quality twisted-pair cable withone ground conductor for each data signal when applicable.

Radio frequencyinterference

If your site is susceptible to problemswith electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), particularly fromlightning or radio transmitters, seek expert advice.

Some of the problems caused by strong sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI) are:

• Destruction of the signal drivers and receivers in the switch

• Electrical hazards as a result of power surges conducted over the lines into the equipment

Electromagneticcompatibility

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 237

• Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 238

• Power Supply in EX2200 Switches

• Power Supply in EX3200 Switches

• Power Supply in EX3300 Switches

• Power Supply in EX4200 Switches on page 25

• AC Power Supply in EX4500 Switches

• DC Power Supply in EX4500 Switches

• AC Power Supplies in an EX6200 Switch

• DC Power Supply in an EX6200 Switch

• AC Power Supply in an EX8200 Switch

• DC Power Supply in an EX8200 Switch

• Power Supply in an EX Series Redundant Power System

• AC Power Supply in a QFX3100 Director Device

• AC Power Supply in a QFX3008-I Interconnect Device

• Wiring Tray in a QFX3008-I Interconnect Device

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.94

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 119: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• AC Power Supply for a QFX3500, QFX3600, or QFX3600-I Device

Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches

The switch must be installed in a rack or cabinet housed in a dry, clean, well-ventilated,

and temperature-controlled environment.

Ensure that these environmental guidelines are followed:

• The site must be as dust-free as possible, because dust can clog air intake vents and

filters, reducing the efficiency of the switch cooling system.

• Maintain ambient airflow for normal switch operation. If the airflow is blocked or

restricted, or if the intake air is too warm, the switch might overheat, leading to the

switch temperature monitor shutting down the switch to protect the hardware

components.

Table 28 on page 95 provides the required environmental conditions for normal switch

operation.

Table 28: EX Series Switch Environmental Tolerances

Environment Tolerance

Switch ordevice SeismicTemperatureRelative humidityAltitude

Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 3.

Normal operation ensured inthe temperature range 32° Fthrough 104° F (0° C through40° C) at altitudes up to5,000 ft (1,524m).

For information on extendedtemperatureSFPs, seeOpticalInterface Support in EX2200Switches.

Normal operation ensuredin relative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)

No performancedegradation up to5,000 feet (1524meters)

EX2200-C

Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 3.

Normal operation ensured inthe temperature range 32° Fthrough 113° F (0° C through45° C)

Normal operation ensuredin relative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)

No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)

EX2200(exceptEX2200-Cmodels)

Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 3.

Normal operation ensured inthe temperature range 32° Fthrough 113° F (0° C through45° C)

Normal operation ensuredin relative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)

No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)

EX3200

Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 3.

Normal operation ensured inthe temperature range 32° Fthrough 113° F (0° C through45° C)

Normal operation ensuredin relative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)

No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)

EX3300

95Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 4: Site Preparation

Page 120: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 28: EX Series Switch Environmental Tolerances (continued)

Environment Tolerance

Switch ordevice SeismicTemperatureRelative humidityAltitude

Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 3.

Normal operation ensured inthe temperature range 32° Fthrough 113° F (0° C through45° C)

Normal operation ensuredin relative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)

No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)

EX4200

Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 3.

Normal operation ensured inthe temperature range 32° Fthrough 113° F (0° C through45° C)

Normal operation ensuredin relative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)

No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)

EX4500

Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 3.

Normal operation ensured inthe temperature range 32° Fthrough 104° F (0° C through40° C)

Normal operation ensuredin relative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)

No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)

EX6210

Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 3.

Normal operation ensured inthe temperature range 32° Fthrough 104° F (0° C through40° C)

Normal operation ensuredin relative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)

No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)

EX8208

Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 3.

Normal operation ensured inthe temperature range 32° Fthrough 104° F (0° C through40° C)

Normal operation ensuredin relative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)

No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)

EX8216

Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 3.

Normal operation ensured inthe temperature range 41° Fthrough 104° F (5° C through40° C)

Normal operation ensuredin relative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)

No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)

XRE200

NOTE: Install EX Series switches only in restricted areas, such as dedicatedequipment roomsandequipmentclosets, inaccordancewithArticles 110–16,110–17, and 110–18 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70.

RelatedDocumentation

• Clearance Requirements for Airflow and HardwareMaintenance for EX2200 Switches

• Clearance Requirements for Airflow andHardwareMaintenance for EX3200 Switches

• Clearance Requirements for Airflow andHardwareMaintenance for EX3300Switches

• Clearance Requirements for Airflow andHardwareMaintenance for EX4200Switches

on page 102

• Clearance Requirements for Airflow andHardwareMaintenance for EX4500Switches

• Clearance Requirements for Airflow andHardwareMaintenance for an EX6210 Switch

• ClearanceRequirements forAirflowandHardwareMaintenance for anEX8208Switch

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.96

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 121: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Clearance Requirements for Airflow andHardwareMaintenance for an EX8216 Switch

97Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 4: Site Preparation

Page 122: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.98

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 123: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 5

Mounting and Clearance Requirements

• Rack Requirements for EX4200 Switches on page 99

• Cabinet Requirements for EX4200 Switches on page 100

• Requirements for Mounting an EX4200 Switch on a Desktop orWall on page 101

• Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX4200

Switches on page 102

Rack Requirements for EX4200 Switches

You canmount the switch on two-post racks or four-post racks.

Rack requirements consist of:

• Rack type

• Mounting bracket hole spacing

• Rack size and strength

• Rack connection to the building structure

Table 29 on page 99 provides the rack requirements and specifications for the switch.

Table 29: Rack Requirements and Specifications for the Switch

GuidelinesRack Requirement

Use a two-post rack or a four-post rack. You canmount the switch on any two-post or four-postrack that provides bracket holes or hole patterns spaced at 1 U (1.75 in./4.45 cm) increments andthat meets the size and strength requirements to support the weight.

AU is thestandard rackunitdefined inCabinets,Racks,Panels, andAssociatedEquipment (documentnumber EIA-310–D) published by the Electronics Industry Association (http://www.eia.org).

The rack must meet the strength requirements to support the weight of the chassis.

Rack type

The holes in the mounting brackets are spaced at 1 U (1.75 in. or 4.45 cm), so that the switch canbemounted in any rack that provides holes spaced at that distance.

Mounting bracket holespacing

99Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 124: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 29: Rack Requirements and Specifications for the Switch (continued)

GuidelinesRack Requirement

• Ensure that the rack complies with standard defined for 19-in. rack as defined in Cabinets, Racks,Panels, and Associated Equipment (document number EIA-310–D) published by the ElectronicsIndustry Association (http://www.eia.org).

• Ensure that the rack rails are spacedwidely enough toaccommodate the switch chassis' externaldimensions . The outer edges of the front-mounting brackets extend the width of the chassis to19 in. (48.2 cm).

• The rack must be strong enough to support the weight of the switch.

• Ensure that the spacing of rails and adjacent racks allows for the proper clearance around theswitch and rack.

Rack size and strength

• Secure the rack to the building structure.

• If earthquakes are a possibility in your geographical area, secure the rack to the floor.

• Secure the rack to the ceiling brackets as well as wall or floor brackets for maximum stability.

Rack connection tobuilding structure

One pair ofmounting brackets formounting the switch on two posts of a rack is supplied

with each switch. For mounting the switch on four posts of a rack or cabinet, you can

order a four-post rack-mount kit separately.

RelatedDocumentation

Chassis Physical Specifications for EX4200 Switches on page 6•

• Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-MountingWarnings on page 226

• Clearance Requirements for Airflow andHardwareMaintenance for EX4200Switches

on page 102

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 132

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 135

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet on page 139

Cabinet Requirements for EX4200 Switches

You canmount the switch in a cabinet that contains a 19-in. rack.

Cabinet requirements consist of:

• Cabinet size

• Clearance requirements

• Cabinet airflow requirements

Table 30onpage 101 provides the cabinet requirements and specifications for the switch.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.100

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 125: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 30: Cabinet Requirements and Specifications for the Switch

GuidelinesCabinet Requirement

• Youcanmount the switch in a cabinet that contains a 19-in.rack as defined in Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and AssociatedEquipment (document number EIA-310–D) published bytheElectronics IndustryAssociation (http://www.eia.org).

• Theminimum cabinet size must be able to accommodatethe maximum external dimensions of the switch.

Cabinet size

• Theouter edgesof themountingbrackets extend thewidthof the chassis to 19 in. (48.3 cm).

• Theminimum total clearance inside the cabinet is 30 in.(76.2cm)between the insideof the frontdoorand the insideof the rear door.

Cabinet clearance

When youmount the switch in a cabinet, ensure thatventilation through the cabinet is sufficient to preventoverheating.

• Ensure adequate cool air supply to dissipate the thermaloutput of the switch or switches.

• Ensure that the cabinet allows the chassis hot exhaust airto exit the cabinet without recirculating into the switch. Anopen cabinet (without a top or doors) that employs hot airexhaust extraction from the top allows the best airflowthrough the chassis. If the cabinet contains a top or doors,perforations in theseelementsassistwith removing thehotair exhaust.

• Install the switch in the cabinet in away thatmaximizes theopen space on the side of the chassis that has the hot airexhaust. This maximizes the clearance for critical airflow.

• Route and dress all cables to minimize the blockage ofairflow to and from the chassis.

• Ensure that thespacingof railsandadjacentcabinetsallowsfor the proper clearance around the switch and cabinet.

• Acabinet larger than theminimumrequiredprovidesbetterairflow and reduces the chance of overheating.

Cabinet airflow requirements

RelatedDocumentation

Clearance Requirements for Airflow andHardwareMaintenance for EX4200Switches

on page 102

• Rack Requirements for EX4200 Switches on page 99

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 132

Requirements for Mounting an EX4200 Switch on a Desktop orWall

You can install the switch on a desktop or wall. When choosing a location, allow at least

6 in. (15.2 cm) of clearance between the front and back of the chassis and adjacent

equipment or walls.

Ensure that the wall onto which the switch is installed is stable and securely supported.

101Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 5: Mounting and Clearance Requirements

Page 126: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

If you are mounting the switch in sheetrock (wall board with a gypsum plaster core) or

in wall board not backed by wall studs, use hollow wall anchors capable of supporting

the combined weight of two fully loaded chassis. Insert the screws into wall studs

wherever possible to provide added support for the chassis.

Use the wall-mount kit from Juniper Networks to mount the switch on a wall. The

wall-mount kit is not part of the standard package andmust be ordered separately.

RelatedDocumentation

Clearance Requirements for Airflow andHardwareMaintenance for EX4200Switches

on page 102

• Wall-MountingWarning for EX4200 Switches on page 230

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch on a Desk or Other Level Surface on page 131

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch on aWall on page 139

ClearanceRequirements forAirflowandHardwareMaintenance for EX4200Switches

When planning the site for installing an EX4200 switch, youmust allow sufficient

clearance around the installed switch (see Figure 20 on page 102).

Figure20:ClearanceRequirementsforAirflowandHardwareMaintenancefor EX4200 Switches

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.102

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 127: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Figure 21: Airflow Through the EX4200 Switch Chassis

• Allow at least 6 in. (15.2 cm) of clearance on the side between devices that have fans

or blowers installed. Allow 2.8 in. (7 cm) between the side of the chassis and any

non-heat-producing surface such as a wall.

• If you are mounting the switch on a rack or cabinet with other equipment, or if you are

placing it on the desktop or floor near other equipment, ensure that the exhaust from

other equipment does not blow into the intake vents of the chassis.

• Leaveat least 24 in. (61 cm)both in frontof andbehind the switch. For servicepersonnel

to remove and install hardware components, youmust leave adequate space at the

front and back of the switch. NEBS GR-63 recommends that you allow at least 30 in.

(76.2 cm) in front of the rack or cabinet and 24 in. (61 cm) behind the rack or cabinet.

RelatedDocumentation

• Rack Requirements for EX4200 Switches on page 99

• Cabinet Requirements for EX4200 Switches on page 100

• General Site Guidelines on page 92

• Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-MountingWarnings on page 226

• Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch on page 30

103Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 5: Mounting and Clearance Requirements

Page 128: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.104

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 129: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 6

Cable Specifications

• Network Cable Specifications for EX4200 Switches on page 105

Network Cable Specifications for EX4200 Switches

EX4200 switches have interfaces that use various types of network cables.

For instructions on connecting an EX4200 switch to a network for out-of-band

management using an Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 connector, see “Connecting an EX

Series Switch to a Network for Out-of-Band Management” on page 163.

For instructions on connecting an EX4200 switch to amanagement console using an

Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 connector, see “Connecting an EX Series Switch to a

Management Console” on page 165.

RelatedDocumentation

• Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX4200 Switch on page 41

• Console Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX Series Switch on page 39

• Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 8

105Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 130: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.106

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 131: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 7

Planning Power Requirements

• Power Specifications for EX4200 Switches on page 107

• AC Power Cord Specifications for EX4200 Switches on page 108

Power Specifications for EX4200 Switches

This topic describes power specifications for power supplies for EX4200 switches.

Table 31 on page 107 provides the AC power supply electrical specifications for EX4200

switches.

Table 32 on page 107 provides the DC power supply electrical specifications for EX4200

switches.

NOTE: This topic uses the term PoE to refer to both PoE and PoE+ unlessthere is a need to distinguish between the two.

Table 31: AC Power Supply Electrical Specifications

SpecificationItem

100 through 240 VACAC input voltage

50 through 60 HzAC input line frequency

• 4 A (for switches with 8 ports equipped for Power over Ethernet (PoE) or theswitch with 24 100Base-FX/1000Base-SX SFP ports)

• 7 A (for switches with 24 ports equipped for PoE)

• 12 A (for switches with 48 ports equipped for PoE)

AC system current rating

Table 32: DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications

SpecificationItem

36 through 72 VDCDC input voltage

7 AmaximumDC input current

107Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 132: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 32: DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications (continued)

SpecificationItem

190WPower supply output

1 msminimumOutput holdup time

NOTE: The DC power supply in EX4200 switches does not support Powerover Ethernet (PoE); you can use either an external power injector or an ACpower supply to supply power to PoE devices that you connect to the switch.

NOTE: For DCpower supplies, we recommend that you provide at least 7.5 Aat 48 VDC and use a facility circuit breaker rated for 10 Aminimum. Doing soenables you to operate the switch in any configuration without upgradingthe power infrastructure, and allows the switch to function at full capacityusingmultiple power supplies.

RelatedDocumentation

AC Power Cord Specifications for EX4200 Switches on page 108•

• Power Supply in EX4200 Switches on page 25

• General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213

• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 237

AC Power Cord Specifications for EX4200 Switches

A detachable AC power cord is supplied with the AC power supplies. The coupler is type

C13 as described by International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standard 60320.

The plug at the male end of the power cord fits into the power source outlet that is

standard for your geographical location.

CAUTION: The AC power cord provided with each power supply is intendedfor use with that power supply only and not for any other use.

NOTE: In North America, AC power cordsmust not exceed 4.5meters(approximately 14.75 feet) in length, to complywith National Electrical Code(NEC) Sections 400-8 (NFPA 75, 5-2.2) and 210-52 and Canadian ElectricalCode (CEC) Section 4-010(3). The cords supplied with the switch are incompliance.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.108

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 133: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 33 on page 109 lists AC power cord specifications provided for each country or

region.

Table 33: AC Power Cord Specifications

Plug TypePlug StandardsElectrical SpecificationsCountry/Region

RA/3IRAM 2073250 VAC, 10 A, 50 HzArgentina

SAA/3AS/NZZS 3112250 VAC, 10 A, 50 HzAustralia

BR/3NBR 14136250 VAC, 10 A, 50 HzBrazil

PRC/3GB 1002-1996250 VAC, 10 A, 50 HzChina

VIIGCEE (7) VII250 VAC, 10 A, 50 HzEurope (except Italy,Switzerland, and UnitedKingdom)

IND/3IS 1293250 VAC, 10 A, 50 HzIndia

IL/3GSI 32/1971250 VAC, 10 A, 50 HzIsrael

I/3GCEI 23-16250 VAC, 10 A, 50 HzItaly

KC-001 andKC-003?

SS-00259 ?125 VAC, 12 A, 50 Hz or 60 HzJapan

VIIGKCEE (7) VII250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz or 60 HzKorea

KC-003?C22.2 ?125 VAC, 13 A, 60 HzNorth America

ZA/3SABS 164/1:1992250 VAC, 10A, 50 HzSouth Africa

12GSEV 6534-2250 VAC, 10 A, 50 HzSwitzerland

?CNS690or IEC60884-1;CNS10917-2, -3 ?

125 VAC, 11 A and 15 A, 50 HzTaiwan

BS89/13BS 1363/A250 VAC, 10 A, 50 HzUnited Kingdom

NOTE: For Taiwan, more than one power cord is provided in the box.

Figure 22 on page 110 illustrates the plug on the power cord for each country or region

listed in Table 33 on page 109.

109Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 7: Planning Power Requirements

Page 134: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Figure 22: AC Plug Types

RelatedDocumentation

• Power Supply in EX4200 Switches on page 25

• General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213

• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 237

• Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 238

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.110

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 135: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 8

Planning the Virtual Chassis

• Understanding EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis Hardware

Configurations on page 111

• Planning EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis on page 113

• Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX4200 Switches on page 115

• Adding a New EX4200 Switch to an Existing EX4200 Virtual Chassis (CLI

Procedure) on page 118

Understanding EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis Hardware Configurations

You can interconnect EX4200 switches together to form a Virtual Chassis composed

exclusively of EX4200 switches. You can interconnect EX4500 switches together to

form a Virtual Chassis composed exclusively of EX4500 switches. You can also

interconnect EX4200 switches with EX4500 switches to form amixed EX4200 and

EX4500 Virtual Chassis.

This topic covers:

• Ports Used to Interconnect Virtual Chassis Members on page 111

• Number of Switches, Required Software Releases, and Member Roles That You

Configure in the Virtual Chassis on page 112

• VirtualChassisModule—aRequiredComponent forVirtualChassisThat IncludeEX4500

Switches on page 113

• Switch Role and Member ID on the LCD Panel on page 113

Ports Used to Interconnect Virtual Chassis Members

You can use the following ports to connect Virtual Chassis members:

• On EX4200 switches:

• The dedicated Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs) on each switch

• SFP, SFP+, or XFP uplink module ports configured as VCPs

• SFP network ports on EX4200-24F switches configured as VCPs

• On EX4500 switches:

111Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 136: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• The dedicated VCPs on each switch

• SFP+ network ports configured as VCPs

• SFP+ uplink module ports configured as VCPs

Number of Switches, Required Software Releases, andMember Roles That You Configure inthe Virtual Chassis

A Virtual Chassis must have onemember designated as the master switch and one

member designated as the backup switch. All other switches in the configuration are

designated as being in the linecard role. Youmanage Virtual Chassis operation through

themaster switch.

The number of switches that you can configure in each of the three types of Virtual

Chassis that are described in this topic and the role that can be assigned to each switch

in the Virtual Chassis depends on the Juniper Networks Junos operating system (Junos

OS) release that is running on the switches.

See the following tables:

• Table 34 on page 112

• Table 35 on page 112

• Table 36 on page 112

Table 34: Number of Switches and Switch Roles for an EX4200 Virtual Chassis, per Junos OSRelease

RoleNumber of SwitchesJunos OS Release

1 master, 1 backup, remainder linecardUp to 10 EX4200 switches9.4 or later

Table 35: Number of Switches and Switch Roles for an EX4500 Virtual Chassis, per Junos OSRelease

RoleNumber of SwitchesJunos OS Release

1 master, 1 backupUp to 2 EX4500 switches11.1—11.3

1 master, 1 backup, remainder linecardUp to 10 EX4500 switches11.4 or later

Table 36: Number of Switches and Switch Roles for a Mixed EX4200 and EX4500 VirtualChassis, per Junos OS Release

RoleNumber of SwitchesJunos OS Release

Master and backup—EX4500 only

Linecard—EX4200

Up to 2 EX4500 switches

Up to 8 EX4200 switches

11.1

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.112

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 137: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 36: Number of Switches and Switch Roles for a Mixed EX4200 and EX4500 VirtualChassis, per Junos OS Release (continued)

RoleNumber of SwitchesJunos OS Release

Master and backup—same switch type, either bothEX4200 or both EX4500

Linecard—remaining switches

Up to 2 EX4500 switches

Up to 8 EX4200 switches

11.2, 11.3

Any switch type in any role. There must be amasterand a backup.

Up to 10 total of both EX4200 and EX4500switches

11.4 or later

Virtual Chassis Module—a Required Component for Virtual Chassis That Include EX4500Switches

The Virtual Chassis module must be installed in an EX4500 switch for that switch to be

part of a Virtual Chassis.

Switch Role andMember ID on the LCD Panel

For each switch in the Virtual Chassis, the switch’s LCD panel displays:

• Role of the switch—RE for master, BK for backup, and LC for linecard member

• Member ID for the Virtual Chassis member—A number in the range 0 through 9

RelatedDocumentation

Understanding EX3300, EX4200, and EX4500 Virtual Chassis Components•

• Planning EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis on page 113

• EX3300, EX4200, and EX4500 Virtual Chassis Overview

Planning EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis

Before interconnecting EX4200 and EX4500 switches in a Virtual Chassis configuration:

• Verify that the rack inwhich theswitchesare installedmeets the requirementsdescribed

in “Rack Requirements for EX4200 Switches” on page 99 and Rack Requirements for

EX4500 Switches. You canmount the switches in a Virtual Chassis on a single rack or

onmultiple racks.

• Verify that the installation site meets the power requirements of the switches in a

Virtual Chassis.

• Verify that youhave installedaVirtualChassismodule in anEX4500switch. TheVirtual

Chassis module must be installed in an EX4500 switch to form a Virtual Chassis.

Table 37 on page 114 describes theVirtual Chassis components and the JunosOS release

running on switches that you need to consider as you plan your EX4200 and EX4500

Virtual Chassis configuration.

113Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 8: Planning the Virtual Chassis

Page 138: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 37: Virtual Chassis Components to Consider when Planning an EX4200 and EX4500Virtual Chassis

Virtual Chassis DetailsJunosOSRelease Runningon the Member SwitchesVirtual Chassis Components

You can interconnect two to ten EX4200 switches to forma Virtual Chassis composed exclusively of EX4200switches.

Junos OS Release 9.0 andlater

EX4200 switches only

You can interconnect two EX4500 switches into a VirtualChassis composed exclusively of EX4500 switches.

Junos OS Releases 11.1, 11.2,and 11.3

EX4500 switches only

You can interconnect upto ten EX4500 switches into aVirtualChassis composedexclusivelyofEX4500switches.

JunosOSRelease 11.4 or later

EX4200 and EX4500 switches can be connected together into the same Virtual Chassisto form amixed EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis. You can interconnect EX4200 andEX4500 switches through the dedicated Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs) to form amixedVirtual Chassis. You can also interconnect EX4500 switches through SFP+ uplinkmoduleports or SFP+network ports configured as VCPs to form a Virtual Chassis.

EX4200 and EX4500 switches

Amixed Virtual Chassis supports up to two EX4500switches and up to eight EX4200 switches.EX4500switchesmustalwaysbeconfigured in themasterand backup roles.

Junos OS Release 11.1

A mixed Virtual Chassis supports up to two EX4500switches and up to eight EX4200 switches.The same type of switch must act in the master andbackup roles. If an EX4200 switch is configured in themaster role, for instance, an EX4200 switch must also beconfigured in the backup role.

Junos OS Releases 11.2 and11.3

Amixed Virtual Chassis supports up to ten total EX4200and EX4500 switches.Any switch can be configured in any role in anyconfiguration. If an EX4500 switch is configured in themaster role, for instance, an EX4200or an EX4500 switchcan be configured in the backup role.

JunosOSRelease 11.4 or later

Table 38 on page 115 describes the cabling requirements for a Virtual Chassis.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.114

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 139: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 38: Cabling Requirements for a Virtual Chassis

DetailsVirtual Chassis Cable LengthSupported

Distance Between VirtualChassis Members

You can interconnect EX4200 and EX4500switches into a Virtual Chassis through VirtualChassisports (VCPs)using the0.5-meterVirtualChassis cable.

• This Virtual Chassis cable is supplied with anEX4200 switch.

• Youmust order this cable separately forEX4500 switches, including those with apreinstalled Virtual Chassis module.

• 0.5 mUp to 0.5 m

Youmust order these cables separately forEX4200 and EX4500 switches, includingEX4500 switches with preinstalled VirtualChassis module.

• 1 m

• 3m

• 5m

0.5 m through 5m

• To interconnect EX4200 switches that areinstalled farther apart than 5m, youmustconfigure the SFP, SPF+, or XFP uplinkmodule ports or the SFP network ports in theEX4200-24F switch as VCPs and use themto interconnect the switches.

• To interconnect EX4500 switches that areinstalled farther apart than 5m, youmustconfigure either the uplink module ports orthe SFP+ network ports as VCPs and usethem to interconnect the switches.

-Greater than 5m

NOTE: If you order Virtual Chassis cables separately, youmust either reusethe cable connector retainers providedwith theoriginal cable or orderVirtualChassis cable connector retainers separately.

RelatedDocumentation

Understanding EX3300, EX4200, and EX4500 Virtual Chassis Components•

• Understanding EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis Hardware Configurations on

page 111

• Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX4200 Switches on page 115

• Clearance Requirements for Airflow andHardwareMaintenance for EX4200Switches

on page 102

• Clearance Requirements for Airflow andHardwareMaintenance for EX4500Switches

Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX4200 Switches

You can install EX4200 switches in a single rack or multiple racks, or in different wiring

closets, and interconnect them to formaVirtual Chassis. There are twodedicatedVirtual

115Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 8: Planning the Virtual Chassis

Page 140: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Chassis ports (VCPs) on the rear panel of the EX4200 switch that are used exclusively

to interconnect EX4200 switches as a Virtual Chassis. The physical location of the

switches in a Virtual Chassis is restricted only by the maximum length supported for

cables toconnect theVCPs.Themaximumcable length for interconnecting thededicated

VCPs is 5 meters. If you want to interconnect EX4200 switches that are located beyond

the reach of the dedicated VCP cables, you can install the XFP uplink module, the SFP

uplink module, or the SFP+ uplink module and set the uplink module ports as VCP

interfaces. See Setting an Uplink Port on an EX3300 or EX4200 Switch as a Virtual

Chassis Port (CLI Procedure).

NOTE: The interfaces for the twodedicatedVCPs are operational by default.However, if youareusing theuplinkmoduleportsasVCPs, youmustexplicitlyset the uplink module ports to function as VCPs.

The following illustrationsdescribevariousVirtualChassis cablingconfigurationexamples.

NOTE: For increased availability and redundancy, we recommend that youalways configure your Virtual Chassis in a ring topology.

Figure 23 on page 116 and Figure 24 on page 117 show five EX4200 switches stacked

vertically in a rack and interconnected in a ring topology using four short Virtual Chassis

cables and one long Virtual Chassis cable.

Figure 23: EX4200 SwitchesMounted on a Single Rack and Connectedin a Ring Topology Using Short and Long Cables: Option 1

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.116

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 141: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Figure 24: EX4200 SwitchesMounted on a Single Rack and Connectedin a Ring Topology Using Short and Long Cables: Option 2

Figure 25 on page 117 shows five EX4200 switches stacked vertically in a rack and

interconnected in a ring topology using short-length andmedium-length Virtual Chassis

cables.

Figure 25: EX4200 SwitchesMounted on a Single Rack and Connectedin a Ring Topology Using Short andMediumCables

Figure 26 on page 117 and Figure 27 on page 117 show five EX4200 switches mounted on

the top rowsofadjacent racksand interconnected ina ring topologyusingmedium-length

and long-length Virtual Chassis cables.

Figure 26: EX4200SwitchesMountedonAdjacentRacksandConnectedin a Ring Topology UsingMedium and Long Cables: Option 1

Figure 27: EX4200SwitchesMounted onAdjacent Racks andConnectedin a Ring Topology UsingMedium and Long Cables: Option 2

117Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 8: Planning the Virtual Chassis

Page 142: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

RelatedDocumentation

Understanding EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis Hardware Configurations on

page 111

• Understanding EX3300, EX4200, and EX4500 Virtual Chassis Components

• Planning EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis on page 113

• Virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches on page 85

• Example:ConfiguringanEX4200VirtualChassis InterconnectedAcrossMultipleWiring

Closets

Adding a New EX4200 Switch to an Existing EX4200 Virtual Chassis (CLI Procedure)

This topic explains how to add an EX4200 switch to an existing EX4200 Virtual Chassis.

For information on adding an EX4200 switchto an EX4500 Virtual Chassis or a mixed

EX4200 and EX4500Virtual Chassis, see Adding an EX4200Switch to a Preprovisioned

EX4500 Virtual Chassis or a Preprovisioned Mixed EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis

(CLI Procedure)..

To add an EX4200 switch to an existing EX4200 Virtual Chassis, use the procedure that

matches what you need to accomplish:

• Adding a New Switch to an Existing Virtual Chassis Within the SameWiring

Closet on page 118

• Adding a New Switch from a DifferentWiring Closet to an Existing Virtual

Chassis on page 120

• Adding a New Switch to an Existing Preprovisioned Virtual Chassis Using

Autoprovisioning on page 121

Adding a New Switch to an Existing Virtual ChassisWithin the SameWiring Closet

This procedure can be used to add an EX4200 switch to an EX4200 Virtual Chassis.

Before you begin, be sure you have:

• Mounted the new switch in a rack.

• Confirmed that the new switch is powered off.

• If you are expanding a preprovisioned configuration, made a note of the serial number

(the number is on the back of the switch). You will need to edit the Virtual Chassis

configuration to include the serial number of the newmember switch.

• If you are expanding a preprovisioned configuration, edited the existing Virtual Chassis

configuration to include the serial number of the newmember switch. The parameters

specified in themaster Virtual Chassis configuration file are applied to the new switch

after it has been interconnected to an existing member switch.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.118

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 143: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

NOTE: After you have created a preprovisioned Virtual Chassisconfiguration, you can use the autoprovisioning feature to addmemberswitches to that configuration.

• (Optional)ConfiguredEthernet interfacesondifferentmember switches into thesame

LAG.. See Example: Configuring Aggregated Ethernet High-Speed Uplinks Between an

EX4200 Virtual Chassis Access Switch and an EX4200 Virtual Chassis Distribution

Switch

An active member switch might temporarily go down before coming back up as part

of this procedure. Having traffic load-balanced across member switches using a LAG

helps alleviate traffic loss during this procedure.

Toaddanewmember switch toanexistingVirtual Chassis configurationwithin the same

wiring closet:

1. If the newmember switch has been previously configured, revert that switch’s

configuration to the factorydefaults. SeeReverting to theDefault FactoryConfiguration

for the EX Series Switch.

2. Interconnect theunpowerednewswitch toonememberof theexistingVirtualChassis

configurationusing thededicatedVirtualChassis ports (VCPs). Connect only oneVCP

on the unpowered new switch to a VCP on amember switch in the existing Virtual

Chassis at this point of the procedure.

3. Power on the new switch.

4. Confirm that the newmember switch is now included within the Virtual Chassis

configuration by checking the front-panel LCD for the member ID. It should display a

member ID that is greater than 0 (1 through 9), because there is already at least one

member of the Virtual Chassis configuration.

NOTE: If you are using a preprovisioned configuration, themember ID isautomaticallyassigned to themember’s serial number in theconfigurationfile.

5. Cable the other dedicated VCP on the newmember switch to the Virtual Chassis.

CAUTION: If you immediately cable bothVCPson the newswitch into theexisting Virtual Chassis at the same time, amember switch that wasalready part of the Virtual Chassis might become nonoperational forseveral seconds. Network traffic to this switch is dropped during thedowntime.

Themember switch will return to the normal operational state with nouser intervention, andnormal operation of theVirtual Chassiswill resumeafter this downtime.

119Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 8: Planning the Virtual Chassis

Page 144: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Adding a New Switch from a DifferentWiring Closet to an Existing Virtual Chassis

This procedure can be used to add an EX4200 switch to an EX4200Virtual Chassis from

a different wiring closet to an existing Virtual Chassis.

To add a new switch from a different wiring closet to an existing Virtual Chassis

configuration, youmust use a long cable to connect themembers switches acrosswiring

closets. You can use any SFP, SFP+, or XFP port and a fiber-optic cable for this purpose.

Before you begin, be sure you have:

• Installed theuplinkmodulesneeded for theVirtualChassis configuration.See “Installing

an Uplink Module in an EX4200 Switch” on page 147.

• Mounted the new switch in a rack.

• If the newmember switch has been previously configured, reverted its configuration

to the factory defaults. See Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX

Series Switch.

• If you are expanding a preprovisioned configuration, made a note of the serial number

(the number is on the back of the switch). You will need to edit the Virtual Chassis

configuration to include the serial number of the newmember switch.

• If you are expanding a preprovisioned configuration, edited the existing Virtual Chassis

configuration to include the serial number of the newmember switch. You can specify

the roleof thenewmember switchwhenyouadd its serial number in theVirtualChassis

configuration file. The parameters specified in themaster Virtual Chassis configuration

file are applied to the new switch after it has been interconnected with its uplink VCP

to an existing member switch.

NOTE: After you have created a preprovisioned Virtual Chassisconfiguration, you can use the autoprovisioning feature to addmemberswitches to that configuration.

To add a newmember switch that is going to be interconnected with the existing Virtual

Chassis configuration across wiring closets:

1. Power on the new switch.

2. Connect a laptop or terminal to the console port of the switch, or use EZSetup on the

LCD Panel of the standalone switch to specify temporary identification parameters.

(When you interconnect the newmember switch with the existing Virtual Chassis

configuration, the master will overwrite and disable any specified parameters that

conflict with the Virtual Chassis parameters or assignedmember configuration.)

3. Use the CLI or the J-Web interface to set one uplink module port as a VCP:

user@switch> request virtual-chassis vc-port set pic-slot 1 port 0

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.120

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 145: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

NOTE: If youareusinganonprovisionedconfiguration, youmightconfigurethe newmember switch with amastership priority value that is less thanthat of the existingmember switches. Doing so ensures that the newmember switch will function in a linecard role when it is included withinthe Virtual Chassis configuration.

4. Power off the new switch.

5. Interconnect the newmember switch to one existing member switch in the Virtual

Chassis configuration using one of the uplink module ports that you has configured

as aVCP. Connect only oneVCPon the unpowered new switch to aVCPon amember

switch in the existing Virtual Chassis at this point of the procedure.

6. Power on the newmember switch.

7. Confirm that the newmember switch is now included within the Virtual Chassis

configuration by checking the front-panel LCD for the member ID. It should display a

member ID that is greater than 0 (1 through 9), because there is already at least one

member of the Virtual Chassis configuration.

NOTE: If you are using a preprovisioned configuration, themember ID isautomaticallyassignedto themember's serial number in theconfigurationfile.

8. Cable another user-configuredVCPon the newmember switch to theVirtual Chassis,

if desired.

CAUTION: If you immediately cable bothVCPson the newswitch into theexisting Virtual Chassis at the same time, amember switch that wasalready part of the Virtual Chassis might become nonoperational forseveral seconds. Network traffic to this switch is dropped during thedowntime.

Themember switch will return to the normal operational state with nouser intervention, andnormal operation of theVirtual Chassiswill resumeafter this downtime.

Adding a New Switch to an Existing Preprovisioned Virtual Chassis Using Autoprovisioning

This procedure can be used to add an EX4200 switch to an existing EX4200 Virtual

Chassis using autoprovisioning.

Before you begin, be sure you have:

• Installed the uplink modules needed for the Virtual Chassis configuration.

• Mounted the new switch in a rack.

121Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 8: Planning the Virtual Chassis

Page 146: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Ensured that the preprovisioned Virtual Chassis configuration has an active master.

For more information, see Example: Configuring an EX4200 Virtual Chassis Using a

Preprovisioned Configuration File.

• On themaster, configured the Link Level Discovery Protocol (LLDP) on the uplink

module ports that will be used as VCPs. LLDP is configured by default but might have

been disabled. To configure LLDP, see Configuring LLDP (CLI Procedure).

• Ensured that the newmember switch has the factory-default configuration. If the new

member switch has been previously configured, revert its configuration to the factory

defaults. See Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch.

• Made a note of the serial number (the number is on the back of the switch). You will

need to edit the Virtual Chassis configuration to include the serial number of the new

member switch.

• Edited the existing Virtual Chassis preprovisioned configuration to include the serial

number of the newmember switch. The parameters specified in the master Virtual

Chassis configuration file are applied to the newmember switch after it has been

interconnected through its uplink VCP to an existing member switch.

• Prepared an existing member switch to interconnect with the new switch through an

uplink module port by configuring an uplink module port as a VCP on the existing

member switch.

• Ensured that the operational modes of the uplink modules on the existing member

switch and the newmember switch match.

• Confirmed that the newmember switch is powered off.

If the preceding conditions are notmet, autoprovisioning will not work and you will need

tomanually configure uplinkmoduleports on the switch tobeadded to the configuration

to be VCPs. For more information, see Setting an Uplink Port on an EX3300 or EX4200

Switch as a Virtual Chassis Port (CLI Procedure).

To add a switch to an existing preprovisioned Virtual Chassis configuration using the

autoprovisioning feature:

1. Interconnect theunpowerednewswitch toonememberof theexistingVirtualChassis

configuration. Only connect one VCP on the unpowered new switch to a VCP on a

member switch in the existing Virtual Chassis at this point of the procedure.

2. Power on the newmember switch.

3. Confirm that the newmember switch is now included in the Virtual Chassis

configuration by checking the front-panel LCD for the member ID. It should display a

member ID in the range from 0 through 9. Themember ID is automatically assigned

to the newmember switch's serial number in the configuration file.

4. Cable the other VCP on the newmember switch to the Virtual Chassis.

CAUTION: If you immediately cable bothVCPson the newswitch into theexisting Virtual Chassis at the same time, amember switch that wasalready part of the Virtual Chassis might become nonoperational for

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.122

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 147: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

several seconds. Network traffic to this switch is dropped during thedowntime.

Themember switch will return to the normal operational state with nouser intervention, andnormal operation of theVirtual Chassiswill resumeafter this downtime.

RelatedDocumentation

• Example: Expanding an EX4200 Virtual Chassis in a SingleWiring Closet

• Example: Setting Up a Multimember EX4200 Virtual Chassis Access Switch with a

Default Configuration

• Example:ConfiguringanEX4200VirtualChassis InterconnectedAcrossMultipleWiring

Closets

• Example: Configuring an EX4200Virtual Chassis Using aPreprovisionedConfiguration

File

• Example:ConfiguringAutomaticSoftwareUpdateonEX4200VirtualChassisMember

Switches

• Monitoring EX3300, EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis Status and Statistics

• Replacing a Member Switch of an EX3300, EX4200, or EX4500 Virtual Chassis

Configuration (CLI Procedure) on page 191

123Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 8: Planning the Virtual Chassis

Page 148: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.124

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 149: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

PART 3

Installing and Connecting the Switch andSwitch Components

• Installing the Switch on page 127

• Installing Switch Components on page 143

• Connecting the Switch on page 153

• Performing Initial Configuration on page 169

125Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 150: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.126

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 151: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 9

Installing the Switch

• Installing and Connecting an EX4200 Switch on page 127

• Unpacking an EX4200 Switch on page 128

• Parts Inventory (Packing List) for an EX4200 Switch on page 129

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch on page 131

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch on a Desk or Other Level Surface on page 131

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 132

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 135

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet on page 139

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch on aWall on page 139

Installing and Connecting an EX4200 Switch

The EX4200 switch chassis is a rigid sheet-metal structure that houses the hardware

components.

To install and connect an EX4200 switch:

1. Follow instructions in “Unpacking an EX4200 Switch” on page 128.

2. Mount the switch by following instructions appropriate for your site:

• “MountinganEX4200SwitchonTwoPosts in aRackorCabinet” onpage 132 (using

the mounting brackets provided)

• “MountinganEX4200SwitchonFourPosts inaRackorCabinet”onpage 135 (using

the separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit)

• “MountinganEX4200Switch inaRecessedPosition inaRackorCabinet”onpage 139

(using the 2-in.-recess front brackets from the separately orderable four-post

rack-mount kit)

• “Mounting an EX4200 Switch on a Desk or Other Level Surface” on page 131 (using

the rubber feet provided)

• “MountinganEX4200SwitchonaWall” onpage 139(using theseparatelyorderable

wall-mount kit)

127Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 152: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

3. Follow instructions in “Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch” on page 153.

4. Follow instructions for connecting power as appropriate for your site:

• Connecting AC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 158

• Connecting DC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 160

5. Perform initial configuration of the switch by following instructions in “Connecting

andConfiguring an EXSeries Switch (CLI Procedure)” on page 173 or “Connecting and

Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure)” on page 175.

6. Set the switch’s management options by following the appropriate instructions:

• Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out-of-Band Management on

page 163

• Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console on page 165

RelatedDocumentation

Rack Requirements for EX4200 Switches on page 99•

• Cabinet Requirements for EX4200 Switches on page 100

• Clearance Requirements for Airflow andHardwareMaintenance for EX4200Switches

on page 102

Unpacking an EX4200 Switch

The EX4200 switch chassis is a rigid sheet-metal structure that houses the hardware

components. EX4200 switches are shipped in a cardboard carton, secured with foam

packing material. The carton also contains an accessory box.

CAUTION: EX4200 switches aremaximally protected inside the shippingcarton. Do not unpack the switches until you are ready to begin installation.

To unpack the switch (see Figure 28 on page 129):

1. Move the shipping carton to a staging area as close to the installation site as possible,

but where you have enough room to remove the system components.

2. Position the carton so that the arrows are pointing up.

3. Open the top flaps on the shipping carton.

4. Remove the accessory box and verify the contents in it against the parts inventory on

the label attached to the carton.

5. Pull out the packing material holding the switch in place.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.128

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 153: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

6. Verify the chassis components received against the packing list included with the

switch. An inventory of parts provided with the switch is provided in “Parts Inventory

(Packing List) for an EX4200 Switch” on page 129.

7. Save the shipping carton and packing materials in case you need to move or ship the

switch later.

Figure 28: Unpacking an EX4200 Switch

RelatedDocumentation

Mounting an EX4200 Switch on page 131•

• Installing and Connecting an EX4200 Switch on page 127

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 173

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure) on page 175

Parts Inventory (Packing List) for an EX4200 Switch

The EX4200 switches are shipped in a cardboard carton, secured with foam packing

material. The carton contains an accessory box.

The switch shipment includes a packing list. Check the parts you receive in the switch

shipping carton against the items on the packing list. The parts shipped depend on the

configuration you order.

If any part on the packing list is missing, contact your customer service representative or

contact Juniper customer care fromwithin the U.S. or Canada by telephone at

129Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 9: Installing the Switch

Page 154: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

1–800–638–8296. For international-dial or direct-dial options in countries without

toll-free numbers, see http://www.juniper.net/support/requesting-support.html.

Table 39 on page 130 lists the parts and their quantities in the packing list.

Table 39: Packing List for an EX4200 Switch

QuantityComponent

1Switch

1Fan tray (preinstalled)

1Power supply (preinstalled in EX4200-24XP and EX4200-48PXmodels or if your order includes a 320WAC power supply)

1AC power cord appropriate for your geographical location (only for AC switch models)

1Power cord retainer clip (only for AC switch models)

2Mounting brackets

8Mounting screws to attach themounting brackets to the switch chassis

4Rubber feet

1RJ-45 cable and RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter

1Virtual Chassis cable

2Virtual Chassis cable connector retainers

24Dust covers for ports (for an EX4200-24F switch)

1Quick Start installation instructions

1Juniper Networks ProductWarranty

1End User License Agreement

NOTE: Youmust providemounting screws that are appropriate for your rackor cabinet tomount the chassis on a rack or a cabinet.

RelatedDocumentation

Unpacking an EX4200 Switch on page 128•

• EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview on page 3

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.130

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 155: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Mounting an EX4200 Switch

You canmount the switch:

• On two posts in a 19-in. rack or cabinet by using the mounting brackets provided with

the switch.

• On four posts in a 19-in. rack or cabinet by using the separately orderable four-post

rack-mount kit.

• In a position recessed 2 in. from the front of a 19-in. rack or cabinet by using the

2-in.-recess front brackets in the separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit. You

canmount the switch in this recessed position on two-post or four-post racks and

cabinets.

• On a desk or other level surface by using rubber feet. The switch is shipped with four

rubber feet to be used to stabilize the chassis on a desk or other level surface.

• On a wall by using the separately orderable wall-mount kit.

The holes in the mounting brackets are placed at 1 U (1.75 in. or 4.45 cm.) apart so that

the switch can bemounted in any rack or cabinet that provides holes spaced at that

distance.

RelatedDocumentation

Mounting an EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 132•

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 135

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet on page 139

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch on a Desk or Other Level Surface on page 131

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch on aWall on page 139

• Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 153

Mounting an EX4200 Switch on a Desk or Other Level Surface

You canmount an EX4200 switch on a desk or other level surface by using the 4 rubber

feet that are shipped with the switch. The rubber feet stabilize the chassis.

Before mounting an EX4200 switch on a desk or other level surface:

• Verify that the site meets the requirements described in “Site Preparation Checklist

for EX4200 Switches” on page 91.

• Place the desk in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for airflow and

maintenance, and secure it to the building structure.

• Read “General Safety Guidelines andWarnings” on page 213, with particular attention

to “Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX4200 Switches” on page 224.

• Remove the switch from the shipping carton (see “Unpacking an EX4200 Switch” on

page 128).

131Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 9: Installing the Switch

Page 156: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• 4 rubber feet to stabilize the chassis on the a desk or other level surface (provided in

the accessory box shipped with the switch)

• Dust covers for ports (for EX4200-24F switches only; optional)

Tomount the switch on a desk or other level surface:

1. Turn the chassis upside down on the desk or the level surface where you intend to

mount the switch.

2. Attach the rubber feet to thebottomof the chassis, as shown in Figure 29onpage 132.

3. Turn the chassis right side up on the desk or the level surface.

4. If it is an EX4200-24F switch, we recommend you insert dust covers in unused SFP

ports.

Figure 29: Attaching Rubber Feet to an EX4200 Switch Chassis

RelatedDocumentation

Connecting AC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 158•

• Connecting DC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 160

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 173

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure) on page 175

• Clearance Requirements for Airflow andHardwareMaintenance for EX4200Switches

on page 102

Mounting an EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet

You canmount an EX4200 switch on two posts of a 19-in. rack or cabinet by using the

mounting brackets provided with the switch. (The remainder of this topic uses “rack” to

mean “rack or cabinet.”)

Youcanmount theswitchon fourpostsofa four-post rackbyusing themountingbrackets

provided with the separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit. See “Mounting an

EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet” on page 135.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.132

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 157: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

NOTE: If you need tomount the switch in a recessed position on either atwo-post rack or a four-post rack, you can use the 2-in.-recess front bracketsprovided in the separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit.

Before mounting the switch on two posts in a rack:

• Verify that the site meets the requirements described in “Site Preparation Checklist

for EX4200 Switches” on page 91.

• Place the rack in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for airflow and

maintenance, and secure it to the building structure.

• Read “General Safety Guidelines andWarnings” on page 213, with particular attention

to “Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX4200 Switches” on page 224.

• Remove the switch from the shipping carton (see “Unpacking an EX4200 Switch” on

page 128).

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2

• 2mounting brackets and 8mounting screws (provided in the accessory box shipped

with the switch)

• Screws to secure the chassis to the rack (not provided)

• 2-in.-recess front brackets if youwillmount the switch in a recessed position (brackets

are from the separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit).

• Dust covers for ports (for EX4200-24F switches only; optional)

NOTE: Onepersonmust be available to lift the switchwhile another securesthe switch to the rack.

CAUTION: If you aremountingmultiple switches on a rack, mount a switchin the bottom of the rack first and proceed tomount the rest of the switchesfrom bottom to top.

Tomount the switch on two posts in a rack:

1. Place the switch on a flat, stable surface.

2. Align the mounting brackets along the front, rear, or center of the side panels of the

switch chassis depending on how you want to mount the switch. For example, if you

want to front-mount the switch, align the brackets along the front of the side panel.

See Figure 30 on page 134.

133Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 9: Installing the Switch

Page 158: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Figure30:AttachingtheMountingBracket to theSidePanelof theSwitch

NOTE: If you need tomount the switch in a recessed position, use the2-in.-recess frontmountbrackets fromtheseparatelyorderable four-postrack-mount kit.

3. Align the bottom holes in the mounting brackets with holes on the side panels of the

switch chassis.

4. Insert mounting screws into the aligned holes. Tighten the screws.

5. Ensure that the other holes in themounting brackets are alignedwith the holes in the

side panels. Insert a screw in each hole and tighten the screws.

6. Have one person grasp both sides of the switch, lift the switch, and position it in the

rack, aligning themountingbracket holeswith the threadedholes in the rackor cabinet

rail. Align the bottom hole in both themounting brackets with a hole in each rack rail,

making sure the chassis is level. See Figure 31 on page 134.

Figure 31: Mounting the Switch on Two Posts in a Rack

g020

094

Mounting rack

Mounting bracket

7. Have a second person secure the switch to the rack by using the appropriate screws.

Tighten the screws.

8. Ensure that the switch chassis is level by verifying that all screws on one side of the

rack are aligned with the screws on the other side.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.134

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 159: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

NOTE: If the switch is anEX4200-24Fmodel,we recommend that you insertdust covers in any unused SFP ports.

RelatedDocumentation

Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 153•

• Connecting AC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 158

• Connecting DC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 160

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 173

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure) on page 175

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet on page 139

• Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-MountingWarnings on page 226

Mounting an EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet

You canmount an EX4200 switch on four posts of a 19-in. rack or cabinet by using the

separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit. (The remainder of this topic uses “rack”

to mean “rack or cabinet.”)

You canmount the switch on two posts in either a two-post rack or a four-post rack by

using themounting brackets providedwith the switch. See “Mounting anEX4200Switch

on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet” on page 132.

NOTE: If you need tomount the switch in a recessed position on either atwo-post rack or a four-post rack, you can use the 2-in.-recess front bracketsprovided in the separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit.

NOTE: If you aremounting an EX4200 switch on four posts, ensure that therack is 27.5 in. through 30.5 in. deep if you will mount the switch flush withthe rack front and that the rack is 29.5 in. through 32.5 in. deep if you willmount the switch 2 in. recessed from the rack front, thus ensuring that theprotective earthing terminal is accessible through the opening in the rearbracket.

Before mounting the switch on four posts in a rack:

• Verify that the site meets the requirements described in “Site Preparation Checklist

for EX4200 Switches” on page 91.

• Place the rack in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for airflow and

maintenance, and secure it to the building structure.

135Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 9: Installing the Switch

Page 160: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Read “General Safety Guidelines andWarnings” on page 213, with particular attention

to “Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX4200 Switches” on page 224.

• Remove the switch from the shipping carton (see “Unpacking an EX4200 Switch” on

page 128).

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2

• 6 flat-head 4-40mounting screws (provided with the four-post rack-mount kit)

• 12 flat-head4x6-mmPhillipsmountingscrews(providedwith the four-post rack-mount

kit)

• One pair each of flush or 2-in.-recess front brackets

• One pair of side-rail brackets

• One pair of rear brackets

• Screws to secure the chassis and the rear brackets to the rack (not provided)

• Dust covers for ports (for EX4200-24F switches only; optional)

NOTE: Onepersonmust be available to lift the switchwhile another securesit to the rack.

CAUTION: If you aremountingmultiple units on a rack, mount the heaviestunit at the bottom of the rack andmount the other units from the bottom ofthe rack to the top in decreasing order of the weight of the units.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.136

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 161: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Tomount the switch on four posts in a rack:

1. Attach the front brackets (either the flush or the 2-in.-recess brackets) to the side-rail

brackets using six 4-40 flat-headPhillipsmounting screws. See Figure 32onpage 137.

Figure 32: Attaching the Front Bracket to the Side-Rail Bracket

2. Place the switch on a flat, stable surface.

3. Align the side-rail brackets along the side panels of the switch chassis. Align the two

holes in the rear of the side-rail brackets with the two holes on the rear of the side

panel.

4. Insert 4x6-mmPhillips flat-headmounting screws into the two aligned holes and

tighten the screws. Ensure that the remaining four holes in the side-rail brackets are

aligned with the four holes in the side panel. See Figure 33 on page 137.

Figure 33: Attaching the Side-Rail Bracket to the Switch Chassis

5. Insert the 4x6-mmPhillips flat-headmounting screws into the remaining four holes

in the side-rail brackets and tighten the screws.

6. Have one person grasp both sides of the switch, lift the switch, and position it in the

rack, aligning the side-rail bracket holes with the threaded holes in the front post of

the rack. Align the bottomhole in both themounting bracketswith a hole in each rack

rail, making sure the chassis is level. See Figure 34 on page 138.

137Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 9: Installing the Switch

Page 162: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Figure 34: Mounting the Switch to the Front Posts in a Rack

g004

477Side-rail

bracket

Switch

Frontbracket

7. Haveasecondpersonsecure the frontof theswitch to the rackbyusing theappropriate

screws for your rack.

8. Slide the rear brackets into the side-rail brackets. See Figure 35 on page 138.

Figure 35: Sliding the Rear Brackets to the Rear of a Four-Post Rack

g004

478Side-rail

bracket

Switch

Rear brackets

9. Attach the rear brackets to the rear post by using the appropriate screws for your rack.

Tighten the screws.

10. Ensure that the switch chassis is level by verifying that all the screws on the front of

the rack are aligned with the screws at the back of the rack.

NOTE: If the switch is anEX4200-24Fmodel,we recommend that you insertdust covers in any unused SFP ports.

RelatedDocumentation

Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 153•

• Connecting AC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 158

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.138

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 163: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Connecting DC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 160

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 173

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure) on page 175

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet on page 139

• Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-MountingWarnings on page 226

Mounting an EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet

You canmount an EX4200 switch in a rack or cabinet such that the switch is recessed

inside the rack from the rack front by 2 inches. You can use the 2-in.-recess front brackets

provided in the separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit to mount the switch in a

recessed position.

Reasons that youmight want to mount the switch in a recessed position include:

• Youaremounting theswitch inacabinetand thecabinetdoorswill not closecompletely

unless the switch is recessed.

• The switch youaremounting has anuplinkmodulewith transceivers installed in it—the

transceivers in the uplink module ports protrude from the front of the switch.

Tomount the switch in a recessed position on four posts, follow the instructions in

“Mounting an EX4200Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet” on page 135. Tomount

the switch in a recessed position on two posts, follow the instructions in “Mounting an

EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet” on page 132.

RelatedDocumentation

Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 153•

• Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-MountingWarnings on page 226

Mounting an EX4200 Switch on aWall

YoucanmountanEX4200switchonawallbyusing theseparatelyorderablewall-mount

kit.

Before mounting the switch on a wall:

• Verify that the site meets the requirements described in “Site Preparation Checklist

for EX4200 Switches” on page 91.

• Read “General Safety Guidelines andWarnings” on page 213, with particular attention

to “Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX4200 Switches” on page 224.

• Remove the switch from the shipping carton (see “Unpacking an EX4200 Switch” on

page 128).

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

139Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 9: Installing the Switch

Page 164: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2

• 2 wall-mount brackets (provided with the wall-mount kit)

• 12 wall-mount bracket screws (provided with the wall-mount kit)

• 4mounting screws (8-32 x 1.25 in. or M4 x 30mm) (not included)

• Dust covers for ports (for EX4200-24F switches only; optional)

• Hollowwall anchors capable of supporting the combined weight of two fully loaded

switches, up to44 lb (20kg) (not included)—if youaremounting theswitch in sheetrock

(wall board with a gypsum plaster core) or in wall board not backed by wall studs

WARNING: Whenmounted in a vertical position, an EX4200 switchmust beorientedwith the front panel of the chassis pointing down in order to ensureproper airflow andmeet safety requirements in the event of a fire.

NOTE: For easier lifting, install any additional power supplies only after youmount the switch on the wall.

Tomount the switch on a wall:

1. Attach thewall-mountbrackets to thesidesof thechassisusing fourof thewall-mount

bracket screws on each side, as shown in Figure 36 on page 140.

Figure 36: AttachingWall-Mount Brackets to the Switch Chassis

g020

200

Front panel

Rear panel

2. If you are mounting two switches together, line the second switch on top of the first

and attach it to themounting brackets using twowall-mount bracket screws on each

side (see Figure 37 on page 141).

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.140

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 165: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

3. Insert the mounting screws in the wall. Insert the top pair of mounting screws

474.35mm apart, and insert the second pair of mounting screws 151.81 mm directly

below the first set.

If themounting screws are inserted in wall boardwith no stud behind it, youmust use

dry wall anchors rated to support 75 lb (34 kg). Insert the screws into wall studs

wherever possible to provide added support for the chassis.

Screw the screws only part way in, leaving about 1/4 in. (6 mm) distance between

the head of the screw and the wall.

4. Grasp each side of the switch or switches, lift the switch or switches, and hang the

brackets from themounting screws as shown in Figure 37 on page 141.

Figure 37: Mounting the Switch on aWall

Hang attached bracketson wall-mounted screws.

g020

201

Frontpanel

Rear panel

5. Tighten themounting screws.

NOTE: If it is an EX4200-24F switch, we recommend you insert dust coversin unused SFP ports.

RelatedDocumentation

• Connecting AC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 158

• Connecting DC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 160

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 173

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure) on page 175

• Wall-MountingWarning for EX4200 Switches on page 230

141Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 9: Installing the Switch

Page 166: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.142

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 167: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 10

Installing Switch Components

• Installing and Removing EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 143

• Installing a Power Supply in an EX4200 Switch on page 144

• Installing a Fan Tray in an EX4200 Switch on page 146

• Installing an Uplink Module in an EX4200 Switch on page 147

• Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 149

• Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch on page 151

Installing and Removing EX4200 Switch Hardware Components

The EX4200 switch chassis is a rigid sheet-metal structure that houses the hardware

components. The field-replaceable units (FRUs) in EX4200 switches are:

• Power supply

• Fan tray

• Uplink module

• SFP transceiver

• SFP+ transceiver

• XFP transceiver

The power supply, fan tray, uplink module, and transceivers are hot-removable and

hot-insertable: You can remove and replace themwithout powering off the switch or

disrupting switch functions.

To install a power supply in an EX4200 switch, follow instructions in “Installing a Power

Supply in an EX4200 Switch” on page 144. To remove a power supply from an EX4200

switch, follow instructions in “Removing a Power Supply from an EX4200 Switch” on

page 182.

To install a fan tray in an EX4200 switch, follow instructions in “Installing a Fan Tray in

an EX4200 Switch” on page 146. To remove a fan tray from an EX4200 switch, follow

instructions in “Removing a Fan Tray from an EX4200 Switch” on page 183.

To install an uplink module in an EX4200 switch, follow instructions in “Installing an

Uplink Module in an EX4200 Switch” on page 147. To remove an uplink module from an

143Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 168: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

EX4200 switch, follow instructions in “Removing an Uplink Module from an EX4200

Switch” on page 185.

To install an SFP, SFP+, or XFP transceiver in an EX4200 switch, follow instructions in

“Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch” on page 149. To remove an SFP, SFP+,

orXFP transceiver fromanEX4200switch, follow instructions in “RemovingaTransceiver

from an EX Series Switch” on page 187.

RelatedDocumentation

Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch on page 30•

• Power Supply in EX4200 Switches on page 25

• Uplink Modules in EX4200 Switches on page 31

• Optical Interface Support in EX4200 Switches on page 42

Installing a Power Supply in an EX4200 Switch

The power supply in EX4200 switches is a hot-removable and hot-insertable

field-replaceable unit (FRU): You can remove and replace it without powering off the

switch or disrupting switch functions.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• A Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2

To install a power supply in the switch (see Figure 38 on page 145):

1. Taking carenot to touchpower supply components, pins, leads, or solder connections,

remove the power supply from its bag.

2. Loosen the locking lever screw on the left front of the power supply by using the

screwdriver.

3. Push down on the locking lever until it is in its lowest position.

4. Using both hands, place the power supply in the power supply slot on the rear panel

of the switch and slide it in until it is fully seated.

NOTE: The handle on the 320WAC power supply is at the bottom of thepower supply faceplate, while the handle on the 600W and the 930WACpower supplies is at the top of the faceplate. The handle on the 190WDC power supply runs across the faceplate.

5. Push the locking lever up to its highestposition (this actionmightpull thepower supply

in).

6. Tighten the locking lever screw by using the screwdriver.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.144

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 169: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Figure 38: Installing a Power Supply in an EX4200 Switch

NOTE: Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated power sourceoutlet.

NOTE: EX4200-24PX and EX4200-48PX switches do not support the 930W (EX-PWR-930-AC) or the 600W (EX-PWR-600-AC) AC power supplies

that are used in the EX4200-48P and the EX4200-24P switchmodels.EX4200-24PXandEX4200-48PXswitchesworkonlywith thepower supplylabeled EX-PWR2-930-AC. You can find the label on the top of the power

supply(see“RemovingaPowerSupply fromanEX4200Switch”onpage182).TheEX-PWR2-930-ACpowersupply is supportedacross theEX4200product

line.

NOTE: If you have a Juniper J-Care service contract, register any addition,change, or upgrade of hardware components athttps://www.juniper.net/customers/csc/management/updateinstallbase.jsp.

Failure to do so can result in significant delays if you need replacement parts.This note applies if you change the type of power supply or add a new typeof uplinkmodule. It does not apply if you replace these componentswith thesame type of component.

RelatedDocumentation

Removing a Power Supply from an EX4200 Switch on page 182•

• Installing and Removing EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 143

• Power Supply in EX4200 Switches on page 25

• Field-Replaceable Units in EX4200 Switches on page 18

• AC Power Cord Specifications for EX4200 Switches on page 108

• Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 8

145Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 10: Installing Switch Components

Page 170: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Troubleshooting Power Supply Installation Alarms on EX4200 Switches

Installing a Fan Tray in an EX4200 Switch

EX4200switches have a single fan tray on the rear panel. The fan tray is a hot-removable

and hot-insertable field-replaceable unit (FRU): You can remove and replace it without

powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• A Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2

To install a fan tray in an EX4200 switch chassis (see Figure 39 on page 146):

CAUTION: If you are installing a fan tray in an EX4200 switch, ensure thefans face downwards.

1. Remove the fan tray from its bag. Using both hands, align the tray with the fan tray

guides on the fan tray slot on the rear panel of the chassis and slide it in until it is fully

seated.

2. Tighten the screw or screws on the fan tray by using the screwdriver.

Figure 39: Installing a Fan Tray in an EX4200 Switch

RelatedDocumentation

Removing a Fan Tray from an EX4200 Switch on page 183•

• Installing and Removing EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 143

• Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch on page 30

• Field-Replaceable Units in EX4200 Switches on page 18

• Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 8

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.146

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 171: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Installing an Uplink Module in an EX4200 Switch

If your EX4200 switch includes an optional uplink module, you install it in the switch's

front panel. The different types of uplink modules are described in “Uplink Modules

Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches” on page 77.

Theuplinkmodule inEX4200switches isahot-removableandhot-insertableunit (FRU):

You can remove and replace it without powering off the switch or disrupting switch

functions.

NOTE: If you have set an uplinkmodule port as a Virtual Chassis port (VCP),removing the uplink module breaks the setting. Youmust reset the port as aVCP after you replace themodule. See Setting an Uplink Port on an EX3300or EX4200 Switch as a Virtual Chassis Port (CLI Procedure).

Before you begin installing an uplink module in the switch:

• Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent ESD damage (see

“Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 238).

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap (If a grounding strap is not available,

followthealternativegroundingmethoddescribed inStep 1of the followingprocedure.)

• Cross-head screwdriver (provided in the uplink module kit)

To install an uplink module in the switch (see Figure 40 on page 148):

1. Attach the electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and

connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis.

If a grounding strap is not available, hold the uplinkmodule in its antistatic bag in one

hand and touch the exposed, bare metal of the switch with the other hand to ground

yourself and the component.

2. Loosen the screws that secure the flip-up door covering the empty uplinkmodule slot

on the front panel of the switch by using the cross-head screwdriver, flip the door

upward, and remove the blanking panel covering the empty uplink module slot.

NOTE: If you are removing an uplinkmodule and installing another uplinkmodule, wait for at least 10 seconds after removing the uplink modulebefore installing the newor the sameuplinkmodule. If you do notwait forat least 10 seconds, the interfaces on the uplink modulemight not comeup.

3. Taking care not to touchmodule components, pins, leads, or solder connections,

remove the uplink module from its bag.

147Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 10: Installing Switch Components

Page 172: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CAUTION: Before you slide the uplink module into the slot on the switchchassis, ensure theuplinkmodule isalignedcorrectly.Misalignmentmightcause the pins to bend, making the uplink module unusable.

4. Using both hands, place the module in the empty slot and slide it in gently until it is

fully seated.

5. Flip the door down and tighten the screws by using the cross-head screwdriver.

NOTE: If the switchdoesnotdetect theuplinkmodule, see “TroubleshootingVirtual Chassis Port Connectivity on an EX4200 Switch” on page 202.

Figure 40: Installing an Uplink Module in an EX4200 Switch

NOTE: If you have a Juniper J-Care service contract, register any addition,change, or upgrade of hardware components athttps://www.juniper.net/customers/csc/management/updateinstallbase.jsp.

Failure to do so can result in significant delays if you need replacement parts.This note applies if you change the type of power supply or add a new typeof uplinkmodule. It does not apply if you replace these componentswith thesame type of component.

RelatedDocumentation

Troubleshooting Virtual Chassis Port Connectivity on an EX4200 Switch on page 202•

• Removing an Uplink Module from an EX4200 Switch on page 185

• Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 149

• Installing and Removing EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 143

• Configuring Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces (CLI Procedure)

• Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 7

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.148

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 173: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch

The transceivers for EX Series switches are hot-removable and hot-insertable

field-replaceable units (FRUs): You can remove and replace themwithout powering off

the switch or disrupting switch functions.

NOTE: After you insert a transceiver or when you change themedia-typeconfiguration, wait for 6 seconds for the interface to display the operationalcommands.

Use only optical transceivers and optical connectors purchased from Juniper Networks

for your EX Series switches.

NOTE: On an EX3200 switch, if you install a transceiver in a 1-gigabit uplinkmodule port, a corresponding network port from the last four built-in portsis disabled. For example, if you install a transceiver in the 1-gigabit uplinkmodule port 2 (ge-0/1/2), then the built-in port 23 (ge-0/0/22) is disabled.

The disabled port is not listed in the output of show interface commands.

Before you begin installing a transceiver in an EX Series switch, ensure that you have

taken the necessary precautions for safe handling of lasers (see “Laser and LED Safety

Guidelines andWarnings for EX Series Switches” on page 219).

Ensure that you have a rubber safety cap available to cover the transceiver.

Figure 41 on page 150 showshow to install anSFP transceiver. The procedure is the same

for all transceiver types.

To install a transceiver in an EX Series switch:

CAUTION: Toavoidelectrostaticdischarge (ESD)damage to the transceiver,do not touch the connector pins at the end of the transceiver.

1. Remove the transceiver from its bag.

2. Check to see whether the transceiver is covered by a rubber safety cap. If it is not,

cover the transceiver with a rubber safety cap.

WARNING: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered exceptwheninserting or removing a cable. The rubber safety cap keeps the port cleanand prevents accidental exposure to laser light.

3. If the port in which you want to install the transceiver is covered with a dust cover,

remove the dust cover and save it in case you need to cover the port later. If you are

149Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 10: Installing Switch Components

Page 174: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

hot-swappinga transceiver,wait for at least 10 secondsafter removing the transceiver

from the port before installing a new transceiver.

4. Using both hands, carefully place the transceiver in the empty port. The connectors

must face the switch chassis.

CAUTION: Before you slide the transceiver into the port, ensure thetransceiver is aligned correctly. Misalignmentmight cause the pins tobend, making the transceiver unusable.

5. Slide the transceiver in gently until it is fully seated.

6. Remove the rubber safety cap when you are ready to connect the cable to the

transceiver.

WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into theends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cablesconnected to transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.

Figure 41: Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch

RelatedDocumentation

Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 187•

• Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to an EX Series Switch on page 167

• Optical Interface Support in EX2200 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX3200 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX3300 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX4200 Switches on page 42

• Optical Interface Support in EX4500 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX6200 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX8200 Switches

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.150

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 175: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch

EX4200switcheshave twoVirtualChassis ports on the rear panel. Youcanuse theVirtual

Chassis ports to interconnect up to 10 EX4200 switches, enabling them to operate as a

unified single high bandwidth switch. To see illustrations of a few Virtual Chassis cabling

configurationexamples, see “VirtualChassisCablingConfigurationExamples for EX4200

Switches” on page 115.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• A cross-head screwdriver (provided in the uplink module kit)

NOTE: If you order Virtual Chassis cables separately, youmust reuse thecable connector retainers provided with the original cable or order VirtualChassis cable connector retainers also separately.

To connect a Virtual Chassis cable to an EX4200 switch (see Figure 42 on page 152):

1. Taking care not to touchmodule components, pins, leads, or solder connections,

remove the Virtual Chassis cable from its bag.

2. Using both hands, place the Virtual Chassis cable connector in the empty Virtual

Chassis port and slide it in gently until it is fully seated.

3. Slide the cable connector retainer over the Virtual Chassis cable connector.

4. Tighten thescrewson thecableconnector retainerbyusing thecross-headscrewdriver.

151Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 10: Installing Switch Components

Page 176: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Figure 42: Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch

g020

122

Slide cable connector retainer overVirtual Chassis cable connector.

RelatedDocumentation

• Disconnecting a Virtual Chassis Cable from an EX4200 Switch on page 190

• Understanding EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis Hardware Configurations on

page 111

• Understanding EX3300, EX4200, and EX4500 Virtual Chassis Components

• Planning EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis on page 113

• Virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches on page 85

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.152

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 177: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 11

Connecting the Switch

• Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 153

• Connecting AC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 158

• Connecting DC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 160

• ConnectinganEXSeriesSwitch toaNetwork forOut-of-BandManagementonpage 163

• Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console on page 165

• Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to an EX Series Switch on page 167

Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch

To ensure proper operation and to meet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI)

requirements, youmust connect an EX Series switch to earth ground before you connect

power to the switch.Use theprotectiveearthing terminal on the switchchassis to connect

to the earth ground (see Figure 44 on page 157).

NOTE: Chassis grounding is required for DC systems and recommended forAC systems. An AC-powered EX Series switch chassis gets additionalgrounding when you plug the power supply in the switch into a grounded ACpower outlet by using an AC power cord appropriate for your geographicallocation.

CAUTION: Beforeyouconnectearthgroundtotheprotectiveearthingterminalof an EX Series switch, ensure that a licensed electrician has attached anappropriate grounding lug to the grounding cable.

Using a grounding cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage theswitch.

153Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 178: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

This topic describes:

• Tools and Parts Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to Earth

Ground on page 154

• Special Instructions to FollowBeforeConnectingEarthGround toaSwitchonpage 155

• Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 157

Tools and Parts Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to Earth Ground

Table 40 on page 154 lists the earthing terminal location, grounding lug specifications,

screws and washers required, and the screwdriver needed for connecting a switch to

earth ground. Before you begin connecting a switch to earth ground, ensure you have the

parts and tools required for your switch.

Table 40: Tools and Parts Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to Earth Ground

AdditionalInformationScrew-driver

Screws andWashers

Grounding LugSpecifications

Grounding CableRequirements

EarthingTerminalLocationSwitch

Phillips(+)number2

• Two 10-32 x .25-in.screws with #10split-lock washer

• Two #10 flatwashers

PanduitLCD6-14BH-L orequivalent

14 AWG (2mm²),minimum90°Cwire, oras permitted by thelocal code

Rear of chassisEX2200

See “SpecialInstructions toFollow BeforeConnectingEarth Groundto a Switch”on page 155.

Phillips(+)number2

• Two 10-32 x .25-in.screws with #10split-lock washer

• Two #10 flatwashers

PanduitLCD6-14BH-L orequivalent

14 AWG (2mm²),minimum90°Cwire, oras permitted by thelocal code

Rear of chassisEX3200

Phillips(+)number2

• Two 10-32 x .25-in.screws with #10split-lock washer

• Two #10 flatwashers

PanduitLCD6-14BH-L orequivalent

14 AWG (2mm²),minimum90°Cwire, oras permitted by thelocal code

Rear of chassisEX3300

See “SpecialInstructions toFollow BeforeConnectingEarth Groundto a Switch”on page 155.

Phillips(+)number2

• Two 10-32 x .25-in.screws with #10split-lock washer

• Two #10 flatwashers

PanduitLCD6-14BH-L orequivalent

14 AWG (2mm²),minimum90°Cwire, oras permitted by thelocal code

Left side ofchassis

EX4200

See “SpecialInstructions toFollow BeforeConnectingEarth Groundto a Switch”on page 155.

Phillips(+)number2

• Two 10-32 x .25-in.screws with #10split-lock washer

• Two #10 flatwashers

PanduitLCD6-14BH-L orequivalent–notprovided

14 AWG (2mm²),minimum90°Cwire, oras permitted by thelocal code

Left side ofchassis

EX4500

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.154

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 179: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table 40: Tools and Parts Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to EarthGround (continued)

AdditionalInformationScrew-driver

Screws andWashers

Grounding LugSpecifications

Grounding CableRequirements

EarthingTerminalLocationSwitch

Phillips(+)number2

• Two¼-20 x 0.5-in.screws with #¼”split-washer-provided

• Two #¼” flatwashers- provided

PanduitLCD2-14A-Q orequivalent -provided

The grounding cablemust be the same gageas the power feedcablesandaspermittedby the local code.

Rear of chassis(on lower leftside)

EX6210

Phillips(+)number2

• Two¼-20 x 0.5-in.screws with #¼”split-washer-provided

• Two #¼” flatwashers- provided

PanduitLCD2-14A-Q orequivalent -provided

6 AWG (13.3 mm²),minimum60°Cwire, oras permitted by thelocal code

Left side ofchassis

EX8208

See “SpecialInstructions toFollow BeforeConnectingEarth Groundto a Switch”on page 155.

Phillips(+)number2

• Two¼-20 x 0.5-in.screws with #¼”split-washer-provided

• Two #¼” flatwashers- provided

PanduitLCD2-14A-Q orequivalent -provided

2 AWG (33.6 mm²),minimum60°Cwire, oras permitted by thelocal code

Two earthingterminals:

• Left side ofchassis

• Rear ofchassis

EX8216

Special Instructions to Follow Before Connecting Earth Ground to a Switch

Table 41 on page 155 lists the special instructions that youmight need to follow before

connecting earth ground to a switch.

Table 41: Special Instructions to Follow Before Connecting Earth Ground to a Switch

Special InstructionsSwitch

NOTE: Some early models of EX3200 switches (Juniper Networks product number on the label next tothe protective earthing terminal is from 750-021xxx through 750-030xxx) require 10-24x.25-in. screws.

EX3200

155Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 11: Connecting the Switch

Page 180: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Table41:Special Instructions toFollowBeforeConnectingEarthGroundtoaSwitch (continued)

Special InstructionsSwitch

NOTE: Some early models of EX4200 switches (Juniper Networks product number on the label next tothe protective earthing terminal is from 750-021xxx through 750-030xxx) require 10-24x.25-in. screws.

NOTE: The protective earthing terminal on an EX4200 switchmounted on four posts is accessible throughthe slot on the left rear bracket only if the rack is 27.5 in. deep through 30.5 in. deep for a switch mountedflush with the rack front and 29.5 in. deep through 32.5 in. deep for a switch mounted 2 in. recessed fromthe rack front. See Figure 43 on page 156.

Figure43: Connecting theGrounding Lug toanEX4200SwitchonaFour-PostRack

g004

479

Protectiveearthing terminal Side-rail

bracket

Rearbracket

Groundinglug

NOTE: The brackets must be attached to the chassis before the grounding lug is attached.(The brackets are shown pulled away from the chassis so that the protective earthing terminalcan be seen.)

EX4200

NOTE: If you plan to mount your switch on four posts of a rack or cabinet, mount your switch in the rackor cabinet before attaching the grounding lug to the switch. SeeMounting an EX4500Switch on Four Postsin a Rack or Cabinet .

NOTE: If youmounted the switch on four posts of a rack using the four-post rack-mount kit, the protectiveearthing terminal on the switch is accessible through the slot on the left rear bracket only if the rack is 27.5in. deep through 30.5 in. deep for a switchmounted flush with the rack front and 29.5 in. deep through 32.5in. deep for a switch mounted 2 in. recessed from the rack front.

EX4500

NOTE: Only one of the two protective earthing terminals needs to be permanently connected to earthground.

EX8216

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.156

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 181: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch

To connect earth ground to a switch:

1. Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground, such as the rack in

which the switch is mounted.

2. Place the grounding lug attached to the grounding cable over the protective earthing

terminal. See Figure 44 on page 157.

Figure 44: Connecting a Grounding Cable to an EX Series Switch

3. Secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing terminal with the washers and

screws.

4. Dress the grounding cable and ensure that it does not touch or block access to other

switch components.

WARNING: Ensure that the cable does not drapewhere people could tripover it.

RelatedDocumentation

Connecting AC Power to an EX2200 Switch•

• Connecting DC Power to an EX2200 Switch

• Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 Switch

• Connecting DC Power to an EX3200 Switch

• Connecting AC Power to an EX3300 Switch

• Connecting DC Power to an EX3300 Switch

• Connecting AC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 158

• Connecting DC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 160

• Connecting AC Power to an EX4500 Switch

• Connecting DC Power to an EX4500 Switch

• Connecting AC Power to an EX6200 Switch

• Connecting DC Power to an EX6200 Switch

157Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 11: Connecting the Switch

Page 182: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Connecting AC Power to an EX8200 Switch

• Connecting DC Power to an EX8200 Switch

• General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213

• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 230

Connecting AC Power to an EX4200 Switch

The power supply in an EX4200 switch is a hot-removable and hot-insertable

field-replaceable unit (FRU) located on the rear panel: You can remove and replace it

without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions.

Before you begin connecting AC power to an EX4200 switch:

• Ensure that you have connected the switch chassis to earth ground.

CAUTION: Before you connect power to the switch, a licensed electricianmustattachacable lug to thegroundingandpower cables that yousupply.A cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the switch (forexample, by causing a short circuit).

Tomeet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements andto ensure proper operation, youmust connect EX4200 switches to earthground before you connect them to power. For installations that require aseparate grounding conductor to the chassis, use the protective earthingterminal on the switch chassis to connect to the earth ground. Forinstructions on connecting earth ground, see “Connecting Earth Ground toan EX Series Switch” on page 153. An EX4200 switch gets additionalgrounding when you plug the power supply in the switch into a groundedAC power outlet by using the AC power cord appropriate for yourgeographical location (see “AC Power Cord Specifications for EX4200Switches” on page 108).

• Install the power supply in the chassis. For instructions on installing a power supply in

an EX4200 switch, see “Installing a Power Supply in an EX4200 Switch” on page 144.

NOTE: Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated power sourceoutlet.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.158

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 183: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• A power cord appropriate for your geographical location

To connect AC power to the switch:

1. Ensure that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis and the screwson their

faceplates are tightened.

2. Squeeze the two sides of the power cord retainer clip and insert the L-shaped ends

of the wire clip into the holes in the bracket on each side of the AC power cord inlet

on the AC power supply faceplate (see Figure 45 on page 160).

3. Locate the power cord or cords shipped with the switch; the cords have plugs

appropriate for your geographical location.

WARNING: Ensure that the power cord does not block access to switchcomponents or drape where people can trip on it.

4. Insert the coupler end of the power cord into the AC power cord inlet on the AC power

supply faceplate.

5. Push the cord into the slot in the adjustment nut of the power cord retainer. Turn the

nut until it is tight against the base of the coupler and the slot in the nut is turned 90°

from the top of the switch (see Figure 46 on page 160).

6. If the AC power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the OFF (0) position.

7. Insert the power cord plug into an AC power source outlet.

8. If the AC power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the ON (|) position.

9. Verify that the ACOK LED on the power supply is lit and is on steadily.

NOTE: Whenyouconnectpower to theswitch, theAlarm(ALM)LED lightsred. This behavior is normal. Plugging an active Ethernet cable into themanagement (MGMT)port on the switch completes the network link andturnsoff theALMLED. (See “ConnectinganEXSeriesSwitch toaNetworkfor Out-of-BandManagement” on page 163.)

Connecting the switch to a dedicatedmanagement console instead of anetworkdoesnotaffect theALMLED.TheLEDremains reduntil theswitchis connected to a network.

159Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 11: Connecting the Switch

Page 184: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Figure 45: Connecting the AC Power Cord Retainer Clip to an AC PowerSupply in an EX4200 Switch

Figure 46: Connecting an AC Power Cord to an AC Power Supply in anEX4200 Switch

RelatedDocumentation

Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 173•

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure) on page 175

• Connecting DC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 160

• Power Supply in EX4200 Switches on page 25

• AC Power Supply LEDs in EX4200 Switches on page 29

Connecting DC Power to an EX4200 Switch

The power supply in an EX4200 switch is a hot-removable and hot-insertable

field-replaceable unit (FRU) located on the rear panel: You can remove and replace it

without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions.

Figure 47: DC Power Supply in an EX4200 Switch

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.160

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 185: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

WARNING: DC-powered EX4200 switches are intended for installation onlyin a restricted access location.

Before you begin connecting DC power to an EX4200 switch:

• Ensure that you have connected the switch chassis to earth ground.

CAUTION: Before you connect power to the switch, a licensed electricianmustattachacable lug to thegroundingandpower cables that yousupply.A cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the switch (forexample, by causing a short circuit).

Tomeet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements andto ensure proper operation, youmust connect EX4200 switches to earthground before you connect them to power. For installations that require aseparate grounding conductor to the chassis, use the protective earthingterminal on the switch chassis to connect to the earth ground. Forinstructions on connecting earth ground, see “Connecting Earth Ground toan EX Series Switch” on page 153.

• Install the power supply in the chassis. For instructions on installing a power supply in

an EX4200 switch, see “Installing a Power Supply in an EX4200 Switch” on page 144.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• DC power source cables (12–14 AWG) with ring lug (Molex 190700067 or equivalent)

(not provided)

• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2

To connect DC power to the switch:

1. Ensure that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis and the screwson their

faceplates are tightened.

2. Ensure that the input circuit breaker is open so that the voltage across the DC power

source cable leads is 0 V and that the cable leads will not become active while you

are connecting DC power.

NOTE: The DC power supply in the switch has four terminals labeled A+,B+,A–,andB–(seeFigure47onpage 160) forconnectingDCpowersourcecables labeled positive (+) and negative (–). The DC power supplies areshippedwith jumpers fromA+ input toB+ input tied together and jumpersfrom A– input to B– input tied together.

161Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 11: Connecting the Switch

Page 186: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

NOTE: The A+ and B+ terminals are referred to as +RTN and A– and B–terminalsare referred toas–48V in “DCPowerWiringSequenceWarning”on page 248 and “DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines” on page 243.

3. Remove thescrewsecuring the terminal blockcover using thescrewdriver and remove

the terminal block cover (see Figure 48 on page 162). Save the screw.

Figure 48: Removing the Terminal Block Cover from a DC Power Supply

4. Remove the screws on the terminals using the screwdriver. Save the screws.

WARNING: Ensure that the power cables do not block access to switchcomponents or drape where people can trip on them.

5. Connect the power supplies to the power sources. Secure power source cables to the

power supplies by screwing the ring lugs attached to the cables to the appropriate

terminals by using the screw from the terminals (see Figure 49 on page 163).

• To connect a power supply to a power source:

a. Leave the jumpers on the power supply terminals in place.

b. Secure the ring lug of the positive (+) DC power source cable to the A+ or B+

terminal on the DC power supply.

c. Secure the ring lug of the negative (–) DC power source cable to the A– or B–

terminal on the DC power supply.

d. Tighten thescrewson thepower supply terminalsuntil snugusing thescrewdriver.

Do not overtighten—apply between 8 lb-in. (0.9 Nm) and 9 lb-in. (1.02 Nm) of

torque to the screws.

If you have a second installed power supply, connect it in the sameway you did the

first.

• To connect one power supply to two power sources:

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.162

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 187: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

a. Remove the jumpers on the power supply terminal block.

b. Secure the ring lug of the positive (+) DC power source cable from the first DC

power source to the A+ terminal on the first DC power supply.

c. Secure the ring lug of the negative (–) DC power source cable from the first DC

power source to the A– terminal on the first DC power supply.

d. Secure the ring lug of the positive (+) DC power source cable from the second

DC power source to the A+ terminal on the second DC power supply.

e. Secure the ring lug of the negative (–) DC power source cable from the second

DC power source to the A– terminal on the second DC power supply.

f. Tighten the screws on the power supply terminals on both the power supplies

until snug using the screwdriver. Do not overtighten—apply between 8 lb-in.

(0.9 Nm) and 9 lb-in. (1.02 Nm) of torque to the screws.

Figure 49: Securing Ring Lugs to the Terminals on the DC Power Supply

6. Replace the terminal block cover and secure it using the screw. Use the screwdriver

to tighten the screw.

7. Close the input circuit breaker.

8. Verify that the LEDs on the power supply are lit green and are on steadily.

RelatedDocumentation

Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 173•

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure) on page 175

• Power Supply in EX4200 Switches on page 25

• DC Power Supply LEDs in EX4200 Switches on page 29

Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out-of-BandManagement

This topic applies to multiple hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which

includes switches and the XRE200 External Routing Engine.

163Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 11: Connecting the Switch

Page 188: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

You canmonitor andmanage these devices using a dedicatedmanagement channel.

Each device has amanagement port with an RJ-45 connector for out-of-band

management. Use the management port to connect the EX Series switch or external

Routing Engine to the management device.

Ensure that you have an Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 connector available. One such

cable is provided with the device. Figure 50 on page 164 shows the RJ-45 connector of

the Ethernet cable supplied with the device.

Figure 50: Ethernet Cable Connector

Toconnectadevice toanetwork forout-of-bandmanagement(seeFigure51onpage 165):

1. Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the management port (labeledMGMT) on

the device.

For the location of theMGMT port on different devices:

• See EX2200 Switches Hardware Overview.

• See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch.

• See Rear Panel of an EX3300 Switch.

• See “Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch” on page 8.

• See Front Panel of an EX4500 Switch.

• See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) Module in an EX6200 Switch.

• See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) Module in an EX8208 Switch.

• See Routing Engine (RE) Module in an EX8216 Switch.

• See Front Panel of an XRE200 External Routing Engine.

2. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the management device.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.164

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 189: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Figure 51: Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out-of-BandManagement

g020

548

Management PC

Management PC

Management PC

To Management port(on the switch)

Managementnetwork

RelatedDocumentation

Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console on page 165•

• Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX2200 Switch

• Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 Switch

• Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3300 Switch

• Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX4200 Switch on page 41

• Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX4500 Switch

• Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX6200 Switch

• Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX8200 Switch

• Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an XRE200 External Routing

Engine

• Cables Connecting the EX6200 Switch to Management Devices

• Cables Connecting the EX8200 Switch to Management Devices

Connecting an EX Series Switch to aManagement Console

This topic applies to multiple hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which

includes switches and the XRE200 External Routing Engine.

You can configure andmanage these devices using a dedicated console. Every device

has a console port with an RJ-45 connector. Use the console port to connect the device

to the management console or to a console server. The console port accepts a cable

with an RJ-45 connector.

Ensure that you have an Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 connector available. An RJ-45

cable and an RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter are supplied with the device.

165Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 11: Connecting the Switch

Page 190: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Figure 52onpage 166 shows theRJ-45 connector of the Ethernet cable suppliedwith the

device.

Figure 52: Ethernet Cable Connector

NOTE: If your laptopor PCdoes not have aDB-9male connector pin and youwant to connect your laptop or PC directly to the device, use a combinationof the RJ-45 to DB-9 female adapter supplied with the device and a USB toDB-9male adapter. Youmust provide the USB to DB-9male adapter.

To connect the device to amanagement console (see Figure 53 on page 167 and Figure

54 on page 167):

1. Connect one end of the Ethernet cable into the console port (labeled CON or

CONSOLE) on the device.

For the location of the CON/CONSOLE port on different devices:

• See EX2200 Switches Hardware Overview.

• See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch.

• See Rear Panel of an EX3300 Switch.

• See “Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch” on page 8.

• See Front Panel of an EX4500 Switch.

• See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) Module in an EX6200 Switch.

• See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) Module in an EX8208 Switch.

• See Routing Engine (RE) Module in an EX8216 Switch.

• See Front Panel of an XRE200 External Routing Engine.

2. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable into the console server (see Figure 53 on

page 167) or management console (see Figure 54 on page 167).

To configure the device from themanagement console, see “Connecting andConfiguring

an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure)” on page 173 or “Connecting and Configuring an EX

Series Switch (J-Web Procedure)” on page 175.

NOTE: EX2200-24T-4G-DC switches do not support switch connection andconfiguration through the J-Web interface.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.166

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 191: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Figure 53: Connecting an EX Series Switch to aManagement ConsoleThrough a Console Server

g020

547

Console server

PC

To Console port(on the switch)

Figure 54: Connecting an EX Series Switch Directly to aManagementConsole

g020

570

Laptop CPUTo Console port(on the switch)

RelatedDocumentation

Configuring the Console Port Type (CLI Procedure)•

• ConnectinganEXSeriesSwitch toaNetwork forOut-of-BandManagementonpage 163

• Console Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX Series Switch on page 39

• Cables Connecting the EX6200 Switch to Management Devices

• Cables Connecting the EX8200 Switch to Management Devices

Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to an EX Series Switch

EX Series switches have field-replaceable unit (FRU) optical transceivers to which you

can connect fiber-optic cables.

Before you begin connecting a fiber-optic cable to an optical transceiver installed in an

EXSeries switch, ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions for safe handling

of lasers (see “Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for EX Series Switches”

on page 219).

To connect a fiber-optic cable to an optical transceiver installed in an EX Series switch:

WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the endsof fiber-opticcables.Fiber-optic transceiversandfiber-opticcablesconnectedto transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.

1. If the fiber-optic cable connector is covered by a rubber safety cap, remove the cap.

Save the cap.

2. Remove the rubber safety cap from the optical transceiver. Save the cap.

3. Insert the cable connector into the optical transceiver (see Figure 55 on page 168).

167Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 11: Connecting the Switch

Page 192: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Figure 55: Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to an Optical TransceiverInstalled in an EX Series Switch

g027

016

Fiber-optic cable

Transceiver

4. Secure thecables so that theyarenot supporting their ownweight. Placeexcess cable

outof theway inaneatly coiled loop.Placing fastenersona loophelps cablesmaintain

their shape.

CAUTION: Do not bend fiber-optic cables beyond their minimum bendradius.Anarcsmaller thana few inches indiametercandamagethecablesand cause problems that are difficult to diagnose.

Do not let fiber-optic cables hang free from the connector. Do not allowfastened loops of cables to dangle, which stresses the cables at thefastening point.

RelatedDocumentation

• Disconnecting a Fiber-Optic Cable from an EX Series Switch on page 189

• Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 149

• Maintaining Fiber-Optic Cables in EX Series Switches on page 197

• Optical Interface Support in EX2200 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX3200 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX3300 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX4200 Switches on page 42

• Optical Interface Support in EX4500 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX6200 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX8200 Switches

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.168

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 193: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 12

Performing Initial Configuration

• EX4200 Default Configuration on page 169

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 173

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure) on page 175

EX4200 Default Configuration

Each EX Series switch is programmedwith a factory default configuration that contains

the values set for each configuration parameter when a switch is shipped. The default

configuration file sets values for systemparameters suchas syslogandcommit; configures

Power over Ethernet (PoE), storm control, and Ethernet switching on all interfaces; and

enables the LLDP and RSTP protocols.

When you commit changes to the configuration, a new configuration file is created that

becomes the active configuration. You can always revert to the factory default

configuration. SeeReverting to theDefault FactoryConfiguration for theEXSeriesSwitch.

The following factory default configuration file is for an EX4200 switch with 24 ports

(for models that havemore ports, this default configuration file has more interfaces):

NOTE: In thisexample,ge-0/0/0 throughge-0/0/23are thenetwork interface

ports.Optionaluplinkmodulesprovideeither two10-gigabit small form-factorpluggable (XFP) transceivers (xe-0/1/0 and xe-0/1/1) or four 1-gigabit SFP

transceivers (ge-0/1/0 through ge-0/1/3). Although you can install only one

uplink module, the interfaces for both are shown below.

system {syslog {user * {any emergency;

}file messages {any notice;authorization info;

}file interactive-commands {interactive-commands any;

}

169Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 194: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

}commit {factory-settings {reset-chassis-lcd-menu;reset-virtual-chassis-configuration;

}}

}interfaces {ge-0/0/0 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/1 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/2 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/3 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/4 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/5 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/6 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/7 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/8 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/9 {unit 0 {

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.170

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 195: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

family ethernet-switching;}

}ge-0/0/10 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/11 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/12 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/13 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/14 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/15 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/16 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/17 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/18 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/19 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/20 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

171Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 12: Performing Initial Configuration

Page 196: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

}}ge-0/0/21 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/22 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/0/23 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}xe-0/1/0 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}xe-0/1/1 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/1/0 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/1/1 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/1/2 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}ge-0/1/3 {unit 0 {family ethernet-switching;

}}

}protocols {igmp-snooping{vlan all;

}lldp {interface all;

}lldp-med {

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.172

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 197: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

interface all;}rstp;

}ethernet-switching-options {storm-control {interface all;

}}poe {interface all;

}

RelatedDocumentation

Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch•

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 173

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure) on page 175

• Understanding Configuration Files for EX Series Switches

• EX Series Switches Interfaces Overview

Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure)

There are twoways to connect and configure an EXSeries switch: onemethod is through

the console using the command-line interface (CLI) and the other is using the J-Web

interface.

NOTE: EX2200-24T-4G-DC switches do not support switch connection andconfiguration through the J-Web interface.

This topic describes the CLI procedure.

NOTE: To run the ezsetup script, the switchmust have the factory default

configuration as the active configuration. If you have configured anything ontheswitchandwant to runezsetup, revert to the factorydefault configuration.

See Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch.

Before you begin connecting and configuring an EX Series switch through the console

using the CLI:

• Set the following parameter values in the console server or PC:

• Baud rate—9600

• Flow control—None

• Data—8

• Parity—None

173Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 12: Performing Initial Configuration

Page 198: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Stop bits—1

• DCD state—Disregard

To connect and configure the switch from the console using the CLI:

1. Connect theconsoleport toa laptoporPCusing theRJ-45 toDB-9serial port adapter.

The RJ-45 cable and RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter are supplied with the switch.

For the location of the console port on different EX Series switches:

• See EX2200 Switches Hardware Overview.

• See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch.

• See Rear Panel of an EX3300 Switch.

• See “Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch” on page 8.

• See Front Panel of an EX4500 Switch.

• See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) Module in an EX6200 Switch.

• See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) Module in an EX8208 Switch.

• See Routing Engine (RE) Module in an EX8216 Switch.

NOTE: In EX2200-C switchmodels, you can also use Mini-USB Type-Bconsole port to connect to a laptop or PC. See “Connecting an EX SeriesSwitch to a Management Console” on page 165.

2. At the Junos OS shell prompt root%, type ezsetup.

3. Enter the hostname. This is optional.

4. Enter the root password you plan to use for this device. You are prompted to re-enter

the root password.

5. Enter yes to enable services like Telnet and SSH. By default, Telnet is not enabled and

SSH is enabled.

NOTE: When Telnet is enabled, you will not be able to log in to an EXSeries switch through Telnet using root credentials. Root login is allowed

only for SSH access.

6. Use the Management Options page to select the management scenario:

NOTE: OnEX4500,EX6200,andEX8200switches,only theout-of-bandmanagement option is available.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.174

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 199: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Configure in-bandmanagement. In this scenario you have the following twooptions:

• Use the default VLAN.

• Create a new VLAN—If you select this option, you are prompted to specify the

VLAN name, VLAN ID, management IP address, and default gateway. Select the

ports that must be part of this VLAN.

• Configure out-of-bandmanagement. Specify the IP address and gateway of the

management interface. Use this IP address to connect to the switch.

7. Specify the SNMP Read Community, Location, and Contact to configure SNMP

parameters. These parameters are optional.

8. Specify the system date and time. Select the time zone from the list. These options

are optional.

9. The configured parameters are displayed. Enter yes to commit the configuration. The

configuration is committed as the active configuration for the switch.

10. (For EX4500 switches only) Enter the request chassis pic-mode intraconnect

operational mode command to set the PICmode to intraconnect.

You can now log inwith the CLI or the J-Web interface to continue configuring the switch.

If you use the J-Web interface to continue configuring the switch, theWeb session is

redirected to the newmanagement IP address. If the connection cannot bemade, the

J-Web interface displays instructions for starting a J-Web session.

RelatedDocumentation

Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure) on page 175•

• Installing and Connecting an EX2200 Switch

• Installing and Connecting an EX3200 Switch

• Installing and Connecting an EX3300 Switch

• Installing and Connecting an EX4200 Switch on page 127

• Installing and Connecting an EX4500 Switch

• Installing and Connecting an EX6210 Switch

• Installing and Connecting an EX8208 Switch

• Installing and Connecting an EX8216 Switch

Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure)

There are twoways to connect and configure an EXSeries switch: onemethod is through

the console using the command-line interface (CLI) and the other is using the J-Web

interface.

NOTE: EX2200-24T-4G-DC switches do not support switch connection andconfiguration through J-Web procedure.

175Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 12: Performing Initial Configuration

Page 200: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

This topic describes the J-Web procedure.

NOTE: Before you begin the configuration, enable a DHCP client on themanagement PC youwill connect to the switch so that the PC can obtain anIP address dynamically.

NOTE: Read the following steps before you begin the configuration. Youmust complete the initial configurationusingEZSetupwithin 10minutes. Theswitch exits EZSetup after 10minutes and reverts to the factory defaultconfiguration, and the PC loses connectivity to the switch.

• EX2200 and EX2200-C switch—The LEDs on the network ports on thefront panel blink when the switch is in the initial setupmode.

• EX3200,EX3300,EX4200,EX4500,EX6200,orEX8200switch—TheLCDpaneldisplaysacount-downtimerwhen theswitch is in initial setupmode.

To connect and configure the switch using the J-Web interface:

1. Transition the switch into initial setupmode:

• EX2200 and EX2200-C switch—Press the mode button located on the lower right

corner of the front panel for 10 seconds.

• EX3200, EX3300, EX4200, EX4500, EX6200, or EX8200 switch—Use theMenuandEnterbuttons located to the right of the LCDpanel (see Figure 56onpage 176):

Figure 56: LCDPanel in anEX3200, EX4200, EX4500, or EX8200Switch

1. Press theMenu button until you seeMAINTENANCEMENU. Then press theEnter button.

2. PressMenu until you see ENTER EZSetup. Then press Enter.

If EZSetup does not appear as an option in the menu, select Factory Default to

return the switch to the factory default configuration. EZSetup is displayed in

themenu of standalone switches onlywhen a switch is set to the factory default

configuration.

3. Press Enter to confirm setup and continue with EZSetup.

2. Connect the Ethernet cable from the Ethernet port on the PC to the switch.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.176

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 201: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• EX2200, EX3200, or EX4200 switch—Connect the cable to port 0 (ge-0/0/0) on

the front panel of the switch.

• EX3300 and EX4500 switch—Connect the cable to the port labeledMGMT on the

front panel of the switch.

• EX6210 switch—Connect the cable to one of the ports labeledMGMT on theSwitch

Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) module in slot 4 or 5 in an EX6210 switch.

• EX8200 switch—Connect the cable to the port labeledMGMT on the Switch Fabric

and Routing Engine (SRE) module in slot SRE0 in an EX8208 switch or on the

Routing Engine (RE) module in slot RE0 in an EX8216 switch.

These ports are configured as the DHCP server with the default IP address, 192.168.1.1.

The switch can assign an IP address to the management PC in the IP address range

192.168.1.2 through 192.168.1.253.

3. From the PC, open aWeb browser, type http://192.168.1.1 in the address field, andpress Enter.

4. On the J-Web login page, type root as the username, leave the password field blank,and click Login.

5. On the Introduction page, clickNext.

6. On the Basic Settings page, modify the hostname, the root password, and date and

time settings:

• Enter the hostname. This is optional.

• Enter a password and reenter the password.

• Specify the time zone.

• Synchronize the date and time settings of the switch with the management PC or

set themmanually by selecting the appropriate option button. This is optional.

ClickNext.

7. Use the Management Options page to select the management scenario:

NOTE: OnEX4500, EX6210, and EX8200 switches, only the out-of-bandmanagement option is available.

• In-bandManagement—Use VLAN 'default' for management.

Select this option to configure all data interfaces asmembers of the default VLAN.

ClickNext. Specify the management IP address and the default gateway for thedefault VLAN.

• In-bandManagement—Create newVLAN formanagement.

Select this option to create amanagement VLAN. ClickNext. Specify the VLANname, VLAN ID, member interfaces, management IP address, and default gateway

for the new VLAN.

177Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 12: Performing Initial Configuration

Page 202: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Out-of-bandManagement—Configuremanagement port.

Select this option to configure only the management interface. ClickNext. Specifythe IP address and default gateway for the management interface.

8. ClickNext.

9. On theManageAccess page, you can select options to enable Telnet, SSH, andSNMP

services. For SNMP, you can configure the read community, location, and contact.

10. ClickNext. The Summary screen displays the configured settings.

11. Click Finish. The configuration is committed as the active switch configuration.

NOTE: After the configuration is committed, the connectivity betweenthePCand the switchmight be lost. To renew the connection, release andrenew the IP address by executing the appropriate commands on themanagement PC or by removing and reinserting the Ethernet cable.

12. (For EX4500switchesonly) In theCLI, enter the requestchassispic-mode intraconnect

operational mode command to set the PICmode to intraconnect.

Youcannow log inusing theCLI or the J-Web interface to continueconfiguring the switch.

If you use the J-Web interface to continue configuring the switch, theWeb session is

redirected to the newmanagement IP address. If the connection cannot bemade, the

J-Web interface displays instructions for starting a J-Web session.

RelatedDocumentation

• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 173

• Installing and Connecting an EX2200 Switch

• Installing and Connecting an EX3200 Switch

• Installing and Connecting an EX3300 Switch

• Installing and Connecting an EX4200 Switch on page 127

• Installing and Connecting an EX4500 Switch

• Installing and Connecting an EX6210 Switch

• Installing and Connecting an EX8208 Switch

• Installing and Connecting an EX8216 Switch

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.178

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 203: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

PART 4

Removing Switch Components

• Removing Switch Components on page 181

179Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 204: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.180

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 205: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 13

Removing Switch Components

• Installing and Removing EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 181

• Removing a Power Supply from an EX4200 Switch on page 182

• Removing a Fan Tray from an EX4200 Switch on page 183

• Removing an Uplink Module from an EX4200 Switch on page 185

• Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 187

• Disconnecting a Fiber-Optic Cable from an EX Series Switch on page 189

• Disconnecting a Virtual Chassis Cable from an EX4200 Switch on page 190

• Replacing a Member Switch of an EX3300, EX4200, or EX4500 Virtual Chassis

Configuration (CLI Procedure) on page 191

Installing and Removing EX4200 Switch Hardware Components

The EX4200 switch chassis is a rigid sheet-metal structure that houses the hardware

components. The field-replaceable units (FRUs) in EX4200 switches are:

• Power supply

• Fan tray

• Uplink module

• SFP transceiver

• SFP+ transceiver

• XFP transceiver

The power supply, fan tray, uplink module, and transceivers are hot-removable and

hot-insertable: You can remove and replace themwithout powering off the switch or

disrupting switch functions.

To install a power supply in an EX4200 switch, follow instructions in “Installing a Power

Supply in an EX4200 Switch” on page 144. To remove a power supply from an EX4200

switch, follow instructions in “Removing a Power Supply from an EX4200 Switch” on

page 182.

181Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 206: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

To install a fan tray in an EX4200 switch, follow instructions in “Installing a Fan Tray in

an EX4200 Switch” on page 146. To remove a fan tray from an EX4200 switch, follow

instructions in “Removing a Fan Tray from an EX4200 Switch” on page 183.

To install an uplink module in an EX4200 switch, follow instructions in “Installing an

Uplink Module in an EX4200 Switch” on page 147. To remove an uplink module from an

EX4200 switch, follow instructions in “Removing an Uplink Module from an EX4200

Switch” on page 185.

To install an SFP, SFP+, or XFP transceiver in an EX4200 switch, follow instructions in

“Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch” on page 149. To remove an SFP, SFP+,

orXFP transceiver fromanEX4200switch, follow instructions in “RemovingaTransceiver

from an EX Series Switch” on page 187.

RelatedDocumentation

Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch on page 30•

• Power Supply in EX4200 Switches on page 25

• Uplink Modules in EX4200 Switches on page 31

• Optical Interface Support in EX4200 Switches on page 42

Removing a Power Supply from an EX4200 Switch

The power supply in the switch is a hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable

unit (FRU): You can remove and replace it without powering off the switch or disrupting

switch functions.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2

• An antistatic bag or an antistatic mat

CAUTION: Do not leave the power supply slot empty for a long timewhilethe switch is on. The power supply must remain in the chassis for properairflow.

To remove a power supply from the switch (see Figure 57 on page 183):

1. Place the antistatic bag or the antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

2. Disconnect power to the switch by performing one of the following:

• AC power supply—If the AC power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the

OFF (0)position. If theACpower sourceoutlet doesnot haveapower switch, gently

pull out the male end of the power cord connected to the power source outlet.

• DC power supply—Switch the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the

DC circuit to the OFF position.

3. Remove the power source cable from the power supply faceplate:

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.182

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 207: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• AC power supply—Gently pull out the female end of the power cord connected to

the power supply faceplate.

• DC power supply—Remove the screws securing the ring lugs attached to the power

source cables to the power supply using the screwdriver, and remove the power

source cables from the power supply. Replace the screws on the terminals and

tighten them.

4. Loosen the locking lever screw on the left front of the power supply by using the

screwdriver.

5. Push down on the locking lever until it is in its lowest position.

6. Grasp the power supply handle and pull firmly to slide it halfway out of the chassis.

7. Place one hand under the power supply to support it and slide it completely out of

the chassis. Take care not to touch power supply components, pins, leads, or solder

connections.

8. Place the power supply in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat placed on a flat,

stable surface.

Figure 57: Removing a Power Supply from the Switch

RelatedDocumentation

Installing a Power Supply in an EX4200 Switch on page 144•

• Installing and Removing EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 143

• Power Supply in EX4200 Switches on page 25

• Field-Replaceable Units in EX4200 Switches on page 18

• AC Power Cord Specifications for EX4200 Switches on page 108

• Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 8

Removing a Fan Tray from an EX4200 Switch

EX4200switches have a single fan tray on the rear panel. The fan tray is a hot-removable

and hot-insertable field-replaceable unit (FRU): You can remove and replace it without

powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions.

183Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components

Page 208: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2

• An antistatic bag or an antistatic mat

To remove a fan tray from the switch:

1. Place the antistatic bag or the antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

2. Loosen the screw or screws securing the fan tray by using the screwdriver.

WARNING: To avoid injury, do not touch the fan with your hands or anytools as you slide the fan tray out of the chassis—the fanmay still berunning.

3. Grasp the handle on the fan tray and pull firmly to slide the fan tray halfway out of

the chassis.

4. When the fan stops spinning, slide the fan tray completely out of the chassis.

5. Place the fan tray in the antistatic bag or on the antistaticmat placed on a flat, stable

surface.

Figure 58: Removing a Fan Tray from an EX4200 Switch

NOTE: When a fan tray is removed, Fan/Blower is Absent is logged in thesystem log and the system raises aminor alarm.

RelatedDocumentation

Installing a Fan Tray in an EX4200 Switch on page 146•

• Installing and Removing EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 143

• Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch on page 30

• Field-Replaceable Units in EX4200 Switches on page 18

• Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 8

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.184

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 209: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Removing an Uplink Module from an EX4200 Switch

If your EX4200 switch includes an optional uplink module, it is installed in the switch's

front panel. The different types of uplink modules are described in “Uplink Modules in

EX4200 Switches” on page 31.

Theuplinkmodule inEX4200switches isahot-removableandhot-insertableunit (FRU):

You can remove and replace it without powering off the switch or disrupting switch

functions.

NOTE: If you have set an uplinkmodule port as a Virtual Chassis port (VCP),removing the uplink module breaks the setting. Youmust reset the port as aVCP after you replace themodule. See Setting an Uplink Port on an EX3300or EX4200 Switch as a Virtual Chassis Port (CLI Procedure).

Before you begin removing an uplink module from the switch:

• Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent ESD damage (see

“Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 238).

• If there are any transceivers installed in the uplink module, remove them before you

remove the uplink module. For instructions on removing transceivers, see “Removing

a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch” on page 187.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap (If a grounding strap is not available,

followthealternativegroundingmethoddescribed inStep 1of the followingprocedure.)

• Cross-head screwdriver (provided in the uplink module kit)

• An antistatic bag or antistatic mat

To remove an uplink module from the switch:

1. Attach the electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and

connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis.

If a grounding strap is not available, touch the exposed, baremetal of the switch with

the other hand to ground yourself and the component.

2. Loosen the screws that secure the flip-up door covering the uplinkmodule slot on the

front panel of the switch by using the cross-head screwdriver providedwith the uplink

module kit and flip the door upward.

3. Insert the ball end of the screwdriver in the keyhole on the front panel of the uplink

module and slide the screwdriver to the narrow part of the keyhole (see Figure 59 on

page 186).

185Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components

Page 210: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CAUTION: Ensure the screwdriver does not slip out of the keyhole whenyou pull the uplink module out of the switch chassis.

4. Using both hands, gently pull the screwdriver to slide the uplink module halfway out

of the chassis (see Figure 60 on page 186).

5. Place one hand under the uplink module to support it and slide it completely out of

the chassis.

6. Slide the screwdriver out of the keyhole.

7. Place the uplink module in an antistatic bag or on an antistatic mat placed on a flat,

stable surface.

Figure 59: Sliding the Screwdriver to the Narrow Part of the Keyhole

Figure 60: Removing an Uplink Module from an EX4200 Switch

RelatedDocumentation

Installing an Uplink Module in an EX4200 Switch on page 147•

• Installing and Removing EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 143

• Field-Replaceable Units in EX4200 Switches on page 18

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.186

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 211: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 7

Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch

The transceivers for EX Series switches are hot-removable and hot-insertable

field-replaceable units (FRUs): You can remove and replace themwithout powering off

the switch or disrupting switch functions.

NOTE: After you remove a transceiver or when you change themedia-typeconfiguration, wait for 6 seconds for the interface to display the operationalcommands.

Before you begin removing a transceiver from an EX Series switch, ensure that you have

taken the necessary precautions for safe handling of lasers (see “Laser and LED Safety

Guidelines andWarnings for EX Series Switches” on page 219).

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• An antistatic bag or an antistatic mat

• Needlenose pliers

• Rubber safety caps to cover the transceiver and fiber-optic cable connector

• A dust cover to cover the port

Figure61onpage 188showshowto removeanSFP transceiver. Theprocedure is thesame

for all transceiver types.

To remove a transceiver from an EX Series switch:

1. Place the antistatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

2. Label the cable connected to the transceiver so that you can reconnect it correctly.

WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into theends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cablesconnected to transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.

WARNING: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered exceptwheninserting or removing a cable. The rubber safety cap keeps the port cleanand prevents accidental exposure to laser light.

CAUTION: Do not bend fiber-optic cables beyond their minimum bendradius.Anarcsmaller thana few inches indiametercandamagethecablesand cause problems that are difficult to diagnose.

187Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components

Page 212: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

3. Remove the cable connected to the transceiver (see “Disconnecting a Fiber-Optic

Cable from an EX Series Switch” on page 189). Cover the transceiver and the end of

each fiber-optic cable connector with a rubber safety cap immediately after

disconnecting the fiber-optic cables.

4. Using your fingers, pull the ejector lever on the transceiver to unlock the transceiver.

CAUTION: Before removingthetransceiver,makesureyouopentheejectorlever completely until you hear it click. This prevents damage to thetransceiver.

5. Using the needlenose pliers, pull the ejector lever out from the transceiver.

6. Grasp the transceiver ejector lever and gently slide the transceiver approximately

0.5 in. (1.3 cm) straight out of the port.

CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage to thetransceiver, do not touch the connector pins at the end of the transceiver.

7. Using your fingers, grasp the body of the transceiver and pull it straight out of the port.

8. Place the transceiver in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat placed on a flat,

stable surface.

9. Place the dust cover over the empty port.

Figure 61: Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch

RelatedDocumentation

Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 149•

• Optical Interface Support in EX2200 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX3200 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX3300 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX4200 Switches on page 42

• Optical Interface Support in EX4500 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX6200 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX8200 Switches

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.188

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 213: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Disconnecting a Fiber-Optic Cable from an EX Series Switch

EX Series switches have field-replaceable unit (FRU) optical transceivers to which you

can connect fiber-optic cables.

Before you begin disconnecting a fiber-optic cable from an optical transceiver installed

in an EX Series switch, ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions for safe

handling of lasers (see “Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for EX Series

Switches” on page 219).

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• A rubber safety cap to cover the transceiver

• A rubber safety cap to cover the fiber-optic cable connector

To disconnect a fiber-optic cable from an optical transceiver installed in the switch:

1. Disable the port in which the transceiver is installed by issuing the command:

[edit interfaces]

user@switch# set interface-name disable

WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into theends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cablesconnected to transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.

2. Carefully unplug the fiber-optic cable connector from the transceiver.

3. Cover the transceiver with a rubber safety cap.

WARNING: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered exceptwheninserting or removing a cable. The rubber safety cap keeps the port cleanand prevents accidental exposure to laser light.

4. Cover the fiber-optic cable connector with the rubber safety cap.

RelatedDocumentation

Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to an EX Series Switch on page 167•

• Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 187

• Maintaining Fiber-Optic Cables in EX Series Switches on page 197

• Optical Interface Support in EX2200 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX3200 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX3300 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX4200 Switches on page 42

189Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components

Page 214: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Optical Interface Support in EX4500 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX6200 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX8200 Switches

Disconnecting a Virtual Chassis Cable from an EX4200 Switch

If you need to disconnect an EX4200 switch from a Virtual Chassis configuration, you

need to disconnect the Virtual Chassis cable from the Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs).

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• A cross-head screwdriver (provided in the uplink module kit)

TodisconnectaVirtualChassis cable fromanEX4200switch (seeFigure62onpage 190):

1. Loosen thescrewson thecableconnector retainerbyusing thecross-headscrewdriver.

2. Slide the cable connector retainer back.

3. Gently pull the release pull tab on the Virtual Chassis cable connector to release the

lock holding the Virtual Chassis cable connector in the Virtual Chassis port.

4. Gently pull the Virtual Chassis cable connector out of the Virtual Chassis port.

Figure 62: Virtual Chassis Cable Connector in an EX4200 Switch

g020

121

Virtual Chassis cable connector

Release pull tab

Cable connector retainer

NOTE: If you order Virtual Chassis cables separately, youmust reuse thecable connector retainers provided with the original cable or order VirtualChassis cable connector retainers also separately.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.190

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 215: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

RelatedDocumentation

Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch on page 151•

• Understanding EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis Hardware Configurations on

page 111

• Understanding EX3300, EX4200, and EX4500 Virtual Chassis Components

• Planning EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis on page 113

• Virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches on page 85

Replacing aMember Switch of an EX3300, EX4200, or EX4500 Virtual ChassisConfiguration (CLI Procedure)

You can replace amember switch of anEX3300Virtual Chassis, EX4200Virtual Chassis,

EX4500 Virtual Chassis, or a mixed EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis without

disruptingnetwork service for theothermembers.Youcan retain theexistingconfiguration

of the member switch and apply it to a newmember switch, or you can free up the

member ID andmake it available for assignment to a newmember switch.

To replace amember switch, use the procedure that matches what you need to

accomplish:

• Remove, Repair, and Reinstall the Same Switch on page 191

• Remove a Member Switch, Replace It with a Different Switch, and Reapply the Old

Configuration on page 192

• Remove a Member Switch and Make Its Member ID Available for Reassignment to a

Different Switch on page 193

Remove, Repair, and Reinstall the Same Switch

If you need to repair a member switch, you can remove it from the Virtual Chassis

configuration without disrupting network service for the other members. Themaster

stores the configuration of the member ID so that it can be reapplied when themember

switch (with the same base MAC address) is reconnected.

1. Power off and disconnect the member switch to be repaired.

2. Repair, as necessary.

3. Reconnect the switch and power it on.

191Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components

Page 216: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

RemoveaMemberSwitch,Replace ItwithaDifferentSwitch,andReapply theOldConfiguration

If you are unable to repair a member switch, you can replace it with a different member

switchand retain theoldconfiguration.Themaster stores theconfigurationof themember

that was removed. When you connect a different member switch, the master assigns a

newmember ID. But the old configuration is still stored under the previous member ID

of the previous member switch.

NOTE: If you have used a preprovisioned configuration, you can use thereplace command to change the serial number in the Virtual Chassis

configuration file. Substitute the serial number of the replacementmemberswitch (on thebackof theswitch) for theserial numberof themember switchthat was removed.

1. Power off and disconnect the member switch to be replaced.

2. If the replacementmember switchhasbeenpreviously configured, revert that switch’s

configuration to the factorydefaults. SeeReverting to theDefault FactoryConfiguration

for the EX Series Switch.

3. Connect one VCP on the replacement member switch to a VCP of a Virtual Chassis

member switch and power the replacement member switch on.

4. Confirm that the newmember switch is now included in the Virtual Chassis

configuration by checking the front-panel LCD for the member ID. It should display a

member ID in the range from 0 through 9.

5. Cable the other VCP on the newmember switch to the Virtual Chassis.

CAUTION: If you immediately cable bothVCPson the newswitch into theexisting Virtual Chassis at the same time, amember switch that wasalready part of the Virtual Chassis might become nonoperational forseveral seconds. Network traffic to this switch is dropped during thedowntime.

Themember switch will return to the normal operational state with nouser intervention, andnormal operation of theVirtual Chassiswill resumeafter this downtime.

6. Issue the request virtual-chassis renumber command from the Virtual Chassismaster

to change themember switch’s current member ID to the member ID that belonged

to the member switch that was removed from the Virtual Chassis configuration.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.192

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 217: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Remove aMember Switch andMake Its Member ID Available for Reassignment to a DifferentSwitch

When you remove amember switch from the Virtual Chassis configuration, the master

keeps that member switch’s member ID on reserve. Tomake that member switch’s

member IDavailable for reassignment, issue the requestvirtual-chassis recyclecommand

from the Virtual Chassis master.

NOTE: When you add or deletemembers in a Virtual Chassis configuration,internal routingchangesmightcause temporary traffic loss fora fewseconds.

RelatedDocumentation

Monitoring EX3300, EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis Status and Statistics•

• AddingaNewSwitch toanExistingEX4200VirtualChassis (CLIProcedure)onpage 118

• Adding an EX4200 Switch to a Preprovisioned EX4500 Virtual Chassis or a

Preprovisioned Mixed EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis (CLI Procedure)

• AddinganEX4500Switch toaPreprovisionedEX4200VirtualChassis (CLIProcedure)

• AddinganEX4500Switch toaNonprovisionedEX4200VirtualChassis (CLIProcedure)

193Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components

Page 218: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.194

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 219: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

PART 5

Switch and Component Maintenance

• Routine Maintenance on page 197

195Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 220: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.196

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 221: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 14

Routine Maintenance

• Maintaining Fiber-Optic Cables in EX Series Switches on page 197

Maintaining Fiber-Optic Cables in EX Series Switches

Fiber-optic cables connect tooptical transceivers that are installed in EXSeries switches.

Tomaintain fiber-optic cables:

• When you unplug a fiber-optic cable from a transceiver, place rubber safety caps over

the transceiver and on the end of the cable.

• Anchor fiber-optic cables to avoid stress on the connectors. When attaching a

fiber-optic cable to a transceiver, be sure to secure the fiber-optic cable so that it is

not supporting its ownweight as it hangs to the floor. Never let a fiber-optic cable hang

free from the connector.

• Avoidbending fiber-opticcablesbeyondtheirminimumbend radius.Bending fiber-optic

cables into arcs smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cables and

cause problems that are difficult to diagnose.

• Frequentpluggingandunpluggingof fiber-optic cables inandoutofoptical instruments

can damage the instruments, which are expensive to repair. Attach a short fiber

extension to the optical equipment. Any wear and tear due to frequent plugging and

unplugging is then absorbed by the short fiber extension, which is easier and less

expensive to replace than the instruments.

• Keep fiber-optic cable connections clean. Micro-deposits of oil and dust in the canal

of the transceiver or cable connector can cause loss of light, reduction in signal power,

and possibly intermittent problems with the optical connection.

Toclean the transceiver canal, useanappropriate fiber-cleaningdevice suchasRIFOCS

Fiber Optic Adaptor CleaningWands (part number 946). Follow the directions in the

cleaning kit you use.

After cleaning the transceiver,make sure that the connector tip of the fiber-optic cable

is clean. Use only an approved alcohol-free fiber-optic cable cleaning kit such as the

Opptex Cletop-S®Fiber Cleaner. Follow the directions in the cleaning kit you use.

RelatedDocumentation

• Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to an EX Series Switch on page 167

• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for EX Series Switches on page 219

197Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 222: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Optical Interface Support in EX2200 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX3200 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX3300 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX4200 Switches on page 42

• Optical Interface Support in EX4500 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX6200 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX8200 Switches

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.198

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 223: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

PART 6

Troubleshooting Switch Components

• Troubleshooting Switch Components on page 201

199Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 224: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.200

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 225: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 15

Troubleshooting Switch Components

• Troubleshooting Network Interfaces on EX4200 Switches on page 201

• Troubleshooting Virtual Chassis Port Connectivity on an EX4200 Switch on page 202

Troubleshooting Network Interfaces on EX4200 Switches

This topicprovides troubleshooting information for specific problems related to interfaces

on EX4200 switches.

• The interface on the port in which an SFP or SFP+ transceiver is installed in an SFP+

uplink module is down on page 201

The interface on the port in which an SFP or SFP+ transceiver is installed in an SFP+ uplinkmodule is down

Problem The interface on the port in which an SFP or SFP+ transceiver is installed in an SFP+

uplink module installed in an EX4200 switch is down.

When you check the statuswith the CLI command show interfaces ge- or with the J-Web

user interface, the disabled port is not listed.

Cause By default, the SFP+ uplink module operates in the 10-gigabit mode and supports only

SFP+ transceivers. The operating mode for the module is incorrectly set.

Solution Either SFP+ or SFP transceivers can be installed in SFP+ uplink modules. Youmust

configure theoperatingmodeof theSFP+uplinkmodule tomatch the typeof transceiver

you want to use. For SFP+ transceivers, configure the 10-gigabit operatingmode and for

SFP transceivers, configure the 1-gigabit operating mode. See Setting the Mode on an

SFP+ Uplink Module (CLI Procedure).

RelatedDocumentation

Troubleshooting Virtual Chassis Port Connectivity on an EX4200 Switch on page 202•

• Monitoring Interface Status and Traffic

• Configuring Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces (CLI Procedure)

• Configuring Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces (J-Web Procedure)

• Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 187

201Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 226: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Uplink Modules in EX4200 Switches on page 31

• EX Series Switches Interfaces Overview

Troubleshooting Virtual Chassis Port Connectivity on an EX4200 Switch

This topic provides troubleshooting information for specific problems related to uplink

module ports on EX4200 switches.

1. Virtual Chassis port (VCP) connection does not work on page 202

Virtual Chassis port (VCP) connection does not work

Problem The Virtual Chassis port (VCP) connection configured in an EX4200 switch does not

work.

A port of the uplink module is set as a VCP.

Cause The uplink module installed in the switch was replaced.

Solution Set a port in the uplink module as a VCP. See Setting an Uplink Port on an EX3300 or

EX4200 Switch as a Virtual Chassis Port (CLI Procedure).

RelatedDocumentation

• Monitoring Interface Status and Traffic

• Configuring Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces (CLI Procedure)

• Configuring Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces (J-Web Procedure)

• Installing an Uplink Module in an EX4200 Switch on page 147

• Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 187

• Uplink Modules in EX4200 Switches on page 31

• Understanding EX4200 and EX4500 Virtual Chassis Hardware Configurations on

page 111

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.202

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 227: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

PART 7

Returning Hardware

• Returning the Switch or Switch Components on page 205

203Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 228: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.204

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 229: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 16

Returning the Switch or SwitchComponents

• Returning an EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement on page 205

• Locating the Serial Number on an EX4200 Switch or Component on page 206

• Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX Series

Switches on page 207

• Packing an EX4200 Switch or Component for Shipping on page 209

Returning an EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement

If you need to return a switch or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or

replacement, follow this procedure:

1. Determine the serial number of the component. For instructions, see “Locating the

Serial Number on an EX4200 Switch or Component” on page 206.

2. Obtain an RMA number from JTAC as described in “Contacting Customer Support to

Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX Series Switches” on page 207.

NOTE: Donot return any component to JuniperNetworks unless youhavefirst obtained an RMA number. Juniper Networks reserves the right torefuse shipments that do not have an RMA. Refused shipments arereturned to the customer through collect freight.

3. Pack theswitchor component for shippingasdescribed in “PackinganEX4200Switch

or Component for Shipping” on page 209.

Formore information about return and repair policies, see the customer support page at

http://www.juniper.net/support/guidelines.html.

RelatedDocumentation

EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview on page 3•

205Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 230: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Locating the Serial Number on an EX4200 Switch or Component

If you are returning a switch or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or

replacement, youmust locate the serial number of the switch or component. Youmust

provide the serial number to the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC)

when you contact them to obtain Return Materials Authorization (RMA).

If the switch is operational and you can access the CLI, you can list serial numbers for

the switch and for some components with a CLI command. If you do not have access to

theCLI or if the serial number for thecomponentdoesnotappear in thecommandoutput,

youcan locate theserial number ID label on thephysical switchor component (seeFigure

63 on page 207).

NOTE: If youwant to findtheserialnumberonthephysicalswitchcomponent,you will need to remove the component from the switch chassis, for whichyoumust have the required parts and tools available.

• Listing the Switch and Components Details with the CLI on page 206

• Locating the Chassis Serial Number ID Label on an EX4200 Switch on page 206

• Locating the Serial Number ID Labels on FRUs in an EX4200 Switch on page 207

Listing the Switch and Components Details with the CLI

To list the switch and switch components and their serial numbers, enter the following

CLI command:

user@switch> show chassis hardwareHardware inventory:Item Version Part number Serial number DescriptionChassis BM0208327733 EX4200-24TRouting Engine 0 REV 11 750-021256 BM0208327733 EX4200-24T, 8 POEFPC 0 REV 11 750-021256 BM0208327733 EX4200-24T, 8 POE CPU BUILTIN BUILTIN FPC CPU PIC 0 BUILTIN BUILTIN 24x 10/100/1000 Base-T PIC 1 REV 03B 711-021270 AR0208162285 4x GE SFPPower Supply 0 REV 03 740-020957 AT0508346354 PS 320W ACFan Tray Fan Tray

Locating the Chassis Serial Number ID Label on an EX4200 Switch

EX4200 switches have serial number ID labels located on the rear panel of the chassis

(see Figure 63 on page 207).

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.206

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 231: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Figure 63: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on an EX4200 Switch

Locating the Serial Number ID Labels on FRUs in an EX4200 Switch

The power supplies, fan trays, and uplink modules installed in EX Series switches are

field-replaceable units (FRUs).

For each of these FRUs, youmust remove the FRU from the switch chassis to see the

FRU’s serial number ID label.

• Power Supply—The serial number ID label is on the top of the power supply. See“Removing a Power Supply from an EX4200 Switch” on page 182.

• Fan tray—The serial number ID label is on the back of the fan tray. See “Installing aFan Tray in an EX4200 Switch” on page 146.

• Uplinkmodule—The serial number ID label is on the circuit board. See “Removing anUplink Module from an EX4200 Switch” on page 185.

RelatedDocumentation

Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX Series

Switches on page 207

• Returning an EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement on page 205

Contacting Customer Support to Obtain ReturnMaterials Authorization for EX SeriesSwitches

If you are returning a switch or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or

replacement, obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) from Juniper Networks

Technical Assistance Center (JTAC).

After locating the serial number of the switchor hardware component youwant to return,

open a Case with Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) on theWeb or

by telephone.

For instructions on locating the serial number of the switch or hardware component you

want to return:

• See Locating the Serial Number on an EX2200 Switch or Component.

• See Locating the Serial Number on an EX3200 Switch or Component.

• See Locating the Serial Number on an EX3300 Switch or Component.

• See “Locating the Serial Number on an EX4200 Switch or Component” on page 206.

207Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 16: Returning the Switch or Switch Components

Page 232: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• See Locating the Serial Number on an EX4500 Switch or Component.

• See Locating the Serial Number on an EX6200 Switch or Component

• See Locating the Serial Number on an EX8200 Switch or Component.

• SeeLocating theSerialNumberonanXRE200ExternalRoutingEngineorComponent.

• SeeLocating theSerialNumberonanEXSeriesRedundantPowerSystemorRedundant

Power System Components.

Before you request an RMA from JTAC, be prepared to provide the following information:

• Your existing case number, if you have one

• Serial number of the component

• Your name, organization name, telephone number, fax number, and shipping address

• Details of the failure or problem

• Type of activity being performed on the switch when the problem occurred

• Configuration data displayed by one or more show commands

You can contact JTAC 24 hours a day, seven days a week on theWeb or by telephone:

• Case Manager at CSC: http://www.juniper.net/cm/

• Telephone: +1-888-314-JTAC1-888-314-5822, toll free in U.S., Canada, and Mexico

NOTE: For international or direct-dial options in countries without toll freenumbers, see http://www.juniper.net/support/requesting-support.html.

If you are contacting JTAC by telephone, enter your 11-digit case number followed by the

pound (#) key for an existing case, or press the star (*) key to be routed to the next

available support engineer.

The support representative validates your request and issues an RMA number for return

of the component.

RelatedDocumentation

Packing an EX2200 Switch or Component for Shipping•

• Packing an EX3200 Switch or Component for Shipping

• Packing an EX3300 Switch or Component for Shipping

• Packing an EX4200 Switch or Component for Shipping on page 209

• Packing an EX4500 Switch or Component for Shipping

• Packing an EX6200 Switch or Component

• Packing an EX8200 Switch or Component

• Packing an EX Series Redundant Power System or Redundant Power System

Components for Shipping

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.208

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 233: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Returning an EX2200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement

• Returning an EX3200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement

• Returning an EX3300 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement

• Returning an EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement on page 205

• Returning an EX4500 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement

• Returning an EX6200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement

• Returning an EX8200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement

Packing an EX4200 Switch or Component for Shipping

If you are returning an EX4200 switch or component to Juniper Networks for repair or

replacement, pack the item as described in this topic.

Before you begin packing the switch or component:

• Ensure that you have retrieved the original shipping carton and packing materials.

Contact your JTAC representative if you do not have these materials, to learn about

approved packing materials. See “Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return

Materials Authorization for EX Series Switches” on page 207.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• Antistatic bag, one for each switch or component

• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2

This topic describes:

• Packing an EX4200 Switch for Shipping on page 209

• Packing EX4200 Switch Components for Shipping on page 210

Packing an EX4200 Switch for Shipping

To pack a switch for shipping:

1. On the console or other management device connected to the switch (to the master

switch in a Virtual Chassis configuration), enter the CLI operational mode and issue

the following command to shut down the switch software:

user@switch> request system halt

Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system

has halted.

2. Disconnect power from the switch by performing one of the following:

• If the power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the OFF (0) position.

• If the power source outlet does not have a power switch, gently pull out the male

end of the power cord connected to the power source outlet.

209Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 16: Returning the Switch or Switch Components

Page 234: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

3. Remove thecables that connect the switch toall external devices. See “Disconnecting

a Fiber-Optic Cable from an EX Series Switch” on page 189.

4. Remove all field-replaceable units (FRUs) from the switch.

5. If the switch is installedonawall, rack, or cabinet, haveoneperson support theweight

of the switch while another person unscrews and removes the mounting screws.

6. Remove the switch from the wall, rack, cabinet, or desk and place the switch in an

antistatic bag.

7. Place the switch in the shipping carton.

8. Place the packing foam on top of and around the switch.

9. If you are returning accessories or FRUs with the switch, pack them as instructed in

the following section.

10. Replace the accessory box on top of the packing foam.

11. Close the top of the cardboard shipping box and seal it with packing tape.

12. Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking.

Packing EX4200 Switch Components for Shipping

CAUTION: Do not stack switch components. Return individual componentsin separate boxes if they do not fit together on one level in the shipping box.

To pack and ship switch components:

• Place individual boards in antistatic bags.

• Ensure that the components are adequately protected with packing materials and

packed so that the pieces are prevented frommoving around inside the carton.

• Close the top of the cardboard shipping box and seal it with packing tape.

• Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking.

RelatedDocumentation

• Returning an EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement on page 205

• Installing a Fan Tray in an EX4200 Switch on page 146

• Removing a Power Supply from an EX4200 Switch on page 182

• Removing an Uplink Module from an EX4200 Switch on page 185

• Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 187

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.210

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 235: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

PART 8

Safety Information

• General Safety Information on page 213

• Radiation and Laser Warnings on page 219

• Installation and Maintenance Safety Information on page 223

• Power and Electrical Safety Information on page 237

211Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 236: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.212

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 237: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 17

General Safety Information

• General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213

• Definitions of SafetyWarning Levels on page 214

• Fire Safety Requirements on page 216

• Qualified Personnel Warning on page 217

• Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden on page 218

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

The following guidelines help ensure your safety and protect the device from damage.

The list of guidelinesmightnotaddressall potentially hazardoussituations in yourworking

environment, so be alert and exercise good judgment at all times.

• Perform only the procedures explicitly described in the hardware documentation for

this device. Make sure that only authorized service personnel perform other system

services.

• Keep the area around the device clear and free from dust before, during, and after

installation.

• Keep tools away from areas where people could trip over themwhile walking.

• Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry, such as rings, bracelets, or chains, which could

become caught in the device.

• Wear safety glasses if you are working under any conditions that could be hazardous

to your eyes.

• Do not perform any actions that create a potential hazard to people or make the

equipment unsafe.

• Never attempt to lift an object that is too heavy for one person to handle.

• Never install or manipulate wiring during electrical storms.

213Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 238: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Never install electrical jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are specifically designed

for wet environments.

• Operate the device only when it is properly grounded.

• Ensure that the separate protective earthing terminal provided on this device is

permanently connected to earth.

• Replace fuses only with fuses of the same type and rating.

• Do not open or remove chassis covers or sheet-metal parts unless instructions are

provided in the hardware documentation for this device. Such an action could cause

severe electrical shock.

• Do not push or force any objects through any opening in the chassis frame. Such an

action could result in electrical shock or fire.

• Avoid spilling liquid onto the chassis or onto any device component. Such an action

could cause electrical shock or damage the device.

• Avoid touching uninsulated electrical wires or terminals that have not been

disconnected from their power source. Such an action could cause electrical shock.

• Always ensure that all modules, power supplies, and cover panels are fully inserted

and that the installation screws are fully tightened.

RelatedDocumentation

AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 240•

• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 243

• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 237

• Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 231

• Installation InstructionsWarning on page 223

• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 230

Definitions of SafetyWarning Levels

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

Thedocumentationuses the following levels of safetywarnings (thereare two “Warning”

formats):

NOTE: Youmight find this information helpful in a particular situation, or youmight overlook this important information if it was not highlighted in a Note.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.214

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 239: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CAUTION: You need to observe the specified guidelines to avoidminor injuryor discomfort to you or severe damage to the device.

WARNING: This symbol alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser.

WARNING: This symbolmeansdanger.Youare inasituation thatcouldcausebodily injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazardsinvolved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices forpreventing accidents.

Waarschuwing Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert ineen situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enigeapparatuur gaat werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrischeschakelingen betrokken risico's en dient u opde hoogte te zijn van standaardmaatregelen om ongelukken te voorkomen.

Varoitus Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa, joka voijohtaa ruumiinvammaan.Ennenkuin työskenteletminkään laitteistonparissa,ota selvää sähkökytkentöihin liittyvistä vaaroista ja tavanomaisistaonnettomuuksien ehkäisykeinoista.

AttentionCe symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvezdansunesituationpouvantcauserdesblessuresoudesdommagescorporels.Avant de travailler sur un équipement, soyez conscient des dangers poséspar les circuits électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédurescouramment utilisées pour éviter les accidents.

Warnung DiesesWarnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einerSituation, die zu einer Körperverletzung führen könnte. Bevor Sie mit derArbeit an irgendeinemGerät beginnen, seien Sie sich der mit elektrischenStromkreisen verbundenen Gefahren und der Standardpraktiken zurVermeidung von Unfällen bewußt.

AvvertenzaQuesto simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazionepotrebbe causare infortuni alle persone. Prima di lavorare su qualsiasiapparecchiatura, occorre conoscere i pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici edessere al corrente delle pratiche standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.

AdvarselDette varselsymbolet betyr fare. Du befinner deg i en situasjon somkan føre til personskade. Før du utfører arbeid på utstyr, må du vareoppmerksom på de faremomentene som elektriske kretser innebærer, samtgjøre deg kjent med vanlig praksis når det gjelder å unngå ulykker.

Aviso Este símbolo de aviso indica perigo. Encontra-se numa situação quelhepoderá causar danos físicos. Antes de começar a trabalhar comqualquerequipamento, familiarize-se com os perigos relacionados com circuitos

215Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 17: General Safety Information

Page 240: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

eléctricos, e com quaisquer práticas comuns que possam prevenir possíveisacidentes.

¡Atención! Este símbolo de aviso significa peligro. Existe riesgo para suintegridad física. Antes demanipular cualquier equipo, considerar los riesgosque entraña la corriente eléctrica y familiarizarse con los procedimientosestándar de prevención de accidentes.

Varning!Denna varningssymbol signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situationsom kan leda till personskada. Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustningmåste du varamedveten om farornamed elkretsar och känna till vanligtförfarande för att förebygga skador.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• Installation InstructionsWarning on page 223

• Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 231

• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 230

• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for EX Series Switches on page 219

• Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden on page 218

• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for the QFX Series

Fire Safety Requirements

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

In the event of a fire emergency involving switches and other network equipment, the

safety of people is the primary concern. You should establish procedures for protecting

people in the event of a fire emergency, provide safety training, and properly provision

fire-control equipment and fire extinguishers.

In addition, you should establish procedures to protect your equipment in the event of a

fire emergency. JuniperNetworksproducts shouldbe installed inanenvironment suitable

for electronic equipment. We recommend that fire suppression equipment be available

in the event of a fire in the vicinity of the equipment and that all local fire, safety, and

electrical codesandordinancesbeobservedwhenyou install andoperateyourequipment.

Fire Suppression

In the event of an electrical hazard or an electrical fire, you should first turn power off to

theequipmentat the source. ThenuseaTypeC fire extinguisher,whichusesnoncorrosive

fire retardants, to extinguish the fire.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.216

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 241: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Fire Suppression Equipment

Type C fire extinguishers, which use noncorrosive fire retardants such as carbon dioxide

andHalotron™,aremosteffective for suppressingelectrical fires. TypeC fire extinguishers

displace oxygen from the point of combustion to eliminate the fire. For extinguishing fire

on or around equipment that draws air from the environment for cooling, you should use

this type of inert oxygen displacement extinguisher instead of an extinguisher that leaves

residues on equipment.

Do not use multipurpose Type ABC chemical fire extinguishers (dry chemical fire

extinguishers). The primary ingredient in these fire extinguishers is monoammonium

phosphate,which is very sticky anddifficult to clean. In addition, in thepresenceofminute

amounts of moisture, monoammonium phosphate can become highly corrosive and

corrodes most metals.

Any equipment in a room in which a chemical fire extinguisher has been discharged is

subject to premature failure and unreliable operation. The equipment is considered to

be irreparably damaged.

NOTE: Tokeepwarrantieseffective,donotuseadrychemical fireextinguisherto control a fire at or near a Juniper Networks switch or other network deviceprovided by Juniper. If a dry chemical fire extinguisher is used, the unit is nolonger eligible for coverage under a service agreement.

We recommend that you dispose of any irreparably damaged equipment in an

environmentally responsible manner.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 237

• Action to Take After an Electrical Accident on page 252

Qualified PersonnelWarning

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

WARNING: Only trainedandqualified personnel should install or replace thedevice.

Waarschuwing Installatie en reparaties mogen uitsluitend door getraind enbevoegd personeel uitgevoerd worden.

VaroitusAinoastaankoulutettu japätevähenkilökuntasaaasentaatai vaihtaatämän laitteen.

217Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 17: General Safety Information

Page 242: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Attention Tout installation ou remplacement de l'appareil doit être réalisépar du personnel qualifié et compétent.

WarnungGerät nur vongeschultem, qualifiziertemPersonal installierenoderauswechseln lassen.

Avvertenza Solo personale addestrato e qualificato deve essere autorizzatoad installare o sostituire questo apparecchio.

Advarsel Kun kvalifisert personell med riktig opplæring bør montere ellerbytte ut dette utstyret.

Aviso Este equipamento deverá ser instalado ou substituído apenas porpessoal devidamente treinado e qualificado.

¡Atención! Estos equipos deben ser instalados y reemplazadosexclusivamenteporpersonal técnicoadecuadamentepreparadoycapacitado.

Varning! Denna utrustning ska endast installeras och bytas ut av utbildadoch kvalificerad personal.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 237

• AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 240

• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 243

Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

WARNING: The equipmentmust be connected to an earthedmainssocket-outlet.

Advarsel Apparatet skal kobles til en jordet stikkontakt.

Varning! Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat nätuttag.

RelatedDocumentation

• General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.218

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 243: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 18

Radiation and Laser Warnings

• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for EX Series Switches on page 219

• Radiation fromOpen Port AperturesWarning on page 221

Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for EX Series Switches

EX Series switches and the XRE200 External Routing Engine are equipped with laser

transmitters, which are considered a Class 1 Laser Product by the U.S. Food and Drug

AdministrationandareevaluatedasaClass 1 LaserProductperEN60825-1 requirements.

Observe the following guidelines and warnings:

• General Laser Safety Guidelines on page 219

• Class 1 Laser ProductWarning on page 219

• Laser BeamWarning on page 220

General Laser Safety Guidelines

When working around ports that support optical transceivers, observe the following

safety guidelines to prevent eye injury:

• Do not look into unterminated ports or at fibers that connect to unknown sources.

• Do not examine unterminated optical ports with optical instruments.

• Avoid direct exposure to the beam.

WARNING: Unterminated optical connectors can emit invisible laserradiation. The lens in the human eye focuses all the laser power on theretina, so focusing the eye directly on a laser source—even a low-powerlaser—could permanently damage the eye.

Class 1 Laser ProductWarning

WARNING: Class 1 laser product.

219Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 244: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Waarschuwing Klasse-1 laser produkt.

Varoitus Luokan 1 lasertuote.

Attention Produit laser de classe I.

Warnung Laserprodukt der Klasse 1.

WARNING: Avvertenza Prodotto laser di Classe 1.

Advarsel Laserprodukt av klasse 1.

Aviso Produto laser de classe 1.

¡Atención! Producto láser Clase I.

Varning! Laserprodukt av klass 1.

Laser BeamWarning

WARNING: Do not stare into the laser beam or view it directly with opticalinstruments.

WARNING: WaarschuwingNiet in de straal staren of hem rechtstreeksbekijkenmet optische instrumenten.

WARNING: VaroitusÄläkatsosäteeseenäläkätarkastelesitäsuoraanoptisenlaitteen avulla.

WARNING: AttentionNe pas fixer le faisceau des yeux, ni l'observerdirectement à l'aide d'instruments optiques.

WARNING: WarnungNicht direkt in den Strahl blicken und ihn nicht direktmit optischen Geräten prüfen.

WARNING: AvvertenzaNon fissare il raggio con gli occhi né usare strumentiottici per osservarlo direttamente.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.220

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 245: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

WARNING: Advarsel Stirr eller se ikke direkte p strlenmed optiskeinstrumenter.

WARNING: AvisoNão olhe fixamente para o raio, nem olhe para eledirectamente com instrumentos ópticos.

WARNING: ¡Atención!Nomirar fijamente el haz ni observarlo directamentecon instrumentos ópticos.

WARNING: Varning! Rikta inte blicken in mot strålen och titta inte direkt påden genom optiska instrument.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• Radiation fromOpen Port AperturesWarning on page 221

• Installation InstructionsWarning on page 223

• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 230

• Optical Interface Support in EX2200 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX3200 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX3300 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX4200 Switches on page 42

• Optical Interface Support in EX4500 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX6200 Switches

• Optical Interface Support in EX8200 Switches

Radiation fromOpen Port AperturesWarning

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

WARNING: Because invisible radiationmight be emitted from the apertureof the portwhen no fiber cable is connected, avoid exposure to radiation anddo not stare into open apertures.

221Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 18: Radiation and Laser Warnings

Page 246: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Waarschuwing Aangezien onzichtbare straling vanuit de opening van depoort kan komen als er geen fiberkabel aangesloten is, dient blootstellingaan straling en het kijken in open openingen vermeden te worden.

Varoitus Koska portin aukosta voi emittoitua näkymätöntä säteilyä, kunkuitukaapelia ei ole kytkettynä, vältä säteilylle altistumista äläkä katsoavoimiin aukkoihin.

Attention Des radiations invisibles à l'il nu pouvant traverser l'ouverture duport lorsqu'aucun câble en fibre optique n'y est connecté, il est recommandéde ne pas regarder fixement l'intérieur de ces ouvertures.

Warnung Aus der Port-Öffnung können unsichtbare Strahlen emittieren,wenn kein Glasfaserkabel angeschlossen ist. Vermeiden Sie es, sich denStrahlungen auszusetzen, und starren Sie nicht in die Öffnungen!

AvvertenzaQuando i cavi in fibranonsono inseriti, radiazioni invisibili possonoessere emesse attraverso l'apertura della porta. Evitate di esporvi alleradiazioni e non guardate direttamente nelle aperture.

AdvarselUnngåutsettelse for stråling, ogstirr ikke inn i åpninger someråpne,fordi usynlig stråling kan emiteres fra portens åpning når det ikke er tilkobleten fiberkabel.

AvisoDadaapossibilidadedeemissãode radiação invisível atravésdoorifícioda via de acesso, quando esta não tiver nenhum cabo de fibra conectado,deverá evitar a exposição à radiação e não deverá olhar fixamente paraorifícios que se encontrarem a descoberto.

¡Atención!Debidoaque laaperturadelpuertopuedeemitir radiación invisiblecuando no existe un cable de fibra conectado, evitemirar directamente a lasaperturas para no exponerse a la radiación.

Varning!Osynlig strålning kan avges från en portöppning utan anslutenfiberkabel ochdubör därför undvika att bli utsatt för strålning genomatt intestirra in i oskyddade öppningar.

RelatedDocumentation

• General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213

• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for EX Series Switches on page 219

• Installation InstructionsWarning on page 223

• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 230

• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for the QFX Series

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.222

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 247: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 19

Installation and Maintenance SafetyInformation

• Installation InstructionsWarning on page 223

• Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX4200 Switches on page 224

• RampWarning on page 225

• Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-MountingWarnings on page 226

• Wall-MountingWarning for EX4200 Switches on page 230

• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 230

• Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 231

Installation InstructionsWarning

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

WARNING: Read the installation instructions before you connect the deviceto a power source.

WaarschuwingRaadpleegde installatie-aanwijzingenvoordatuhetsysteemmet de voeding verbindt.

VaroitusLueasennusohjeetennen järjestelmänyhdistämistävirtalähteeseen.

AttentionAvantdebrancher lesystèmesur lasourced'alimentation,consulterles directives d'installation.

Warnung Lesen Sie die Installationsanweisungen, bevor Sie das System andie Stromquelle anschließen.

AvvertenzaConsultare le istruzionidi installazioneprimadicollegare il sistemaall'alimentatore.

Advarsel Les installasjonsinstruksjonene før systemet kobles til strømkilden.

223Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 248: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Aviso Leia as instruções de instalação antes de ligar o sistema à sua fontede energia.

¡Atención! Ver las instrucciones de instalación antes de conectar el sistemaa la red de alimentación.

Varning! Läs installationsanvisningarna innan du kopplar systemet till dessströmförsörjningsenhet.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for EX Series Switches on page 219

• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 230

• Connecting AC Power to an EX2200 Switch

• Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 Switch

• Connecting AC Power to an EX3300 Switch

• Connecting AC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 158

• Connecting AC Power to an EX4500 Switch

• Connecting AC Power to an EX6200 Switch

• Connecting AC Power to an EX8200 Switch

• Connecting DC Power to an EX2200 Switch

• Connecting DC Power to an EX3200 Switch

• Connecting DC Power to an EX3300 Switch

• Connecting DC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 160

• Connecting DC Power to an EX4500 Switch

• Connecting DC Power to an EX6200 Switch

• Connecting DC Power to an EX8200 Switch

• Connecting AC Power to an XRE200 External Routing Engine

• Connecting DC Power to an XRE200 External Routing Engine

• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for the QFX Series

• Connecting AC Power to a QFX3500 Device

• Connecting Power to an EX Series Redundant Power System Power Supply

Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX4200 Switches

Theweightofa fully loadedEX4200switchchassis is approximately22 lb (10kg).Observe

the following guidelines for lifting andmoving an EX4200 switch:

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.224

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 249: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Before installing an EX4200 switch, read the guidelines in “Site Preparation Checklist

for EX4200 Switches” on page 91 to verify that the intended site meets the specified

power, environmental, and clearance requirements.

• Before lifting or moving the EX4200 switch, disconnect all external cables.

• Aswhen lifting any heavy object, lift most of theweight with your legs rather than your

back. Keep your knees bent and your back relatively straight and avoid twisting your

body as you lift. Balance the load evenly and be sure that your footing is solid.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• Installation InstructionsWarning on page 223

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch on page 131

RampWarning

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

WARNING: When installing the device, do not use a ramp inclined at morethan 10 degrees.

WaarschuwingGebruik een oprijplaat niet onder een hoek vanmeer dan 10graden.

VaroitusÄläkäytäsellaistakaltevaapintaa, jonkakaltevuusylittää 10astetta.

AttentionNe pas utiliser une rampe dont l'inclinaison est supérieure à 10degrés.

WarnungKeine Rampenmit einer Neigung vonmehr als 10 Grad verwenden.

AvvertenzaNon usare una rampa con pendenza superiore a 10 gradi.

Advarsel Bruk aldri en rampe som heller mer enn 10 grader.

AvisoNão utilize uma rampa com uma inclinação superior a 10 graus.

¡Atención!No usar una rampa inclinadamás de 10 grados

Varning! Använd inte rampmed en lutning påmer än 10 grader.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• Installation InstructionsWarning on page 223

• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 230

225Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information

Page 250: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-MountingWarnings

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

Ensure that the rack or cabinet in which the device is installed is evenly and securely

supported. Unevenmechanical loading could lead to a hazardous condition.

WARNING: To prevent bodily injury whenmounting or servicing the devicein a rack, take the following precautions to ensure that the system remainsstable. The following directives helpmaintain your safety:

• The devicemust be installed in a rack that is secured to the buildingstructure.

• Thedevice should bemountedat thebottomof the rack if it is the only unitin the rack.

• Whenmounting the device on a partially filled rack, load the rack from thebottom to the topwith the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack.

• If the rack is provided with stabilizing equipment, install the stabilizersbeforemounting or servicing the device in the rack.

WaarschuwingOm lichamelijk letsel te voorkomenwanneer u dit toestel ineen rekmonteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft, moet u specialevoorzorgsmaatregelen nemen om ervoor te zorgen dat het toestel stabielblijft. De onderstaande richtlijnen worden verstrekt om uw veiligheid teverzekeren:

• De Juniper Networks switchmoet in een stellage worden geïnstalleerd dieaan een bouwsel is verankerd.

• Dit toestel dient onderaan in het rek gemonteerd teworden als het toestelhet enige in het rek is.

• Wanneer u dit toestel in een gedeeltelijk gevuld rekmonteert, dient u hetrekvanonderennaarboven te ladenmethet zwaarsteonderdeelonderaanin het rek.

• Als het rek voorzien is van stabiliseringshulpmiddelen, dient u destabilisatoren temonteren voordat u het toestel in het rekmonteert of hetdaar een servicebeurt geeft.

VaroitusKun laiteasetetaan telineeseen taihuolletaansenollessa telineessä,onnoudatettavaerityisiävarotoimia järjestelmänvakavuudensäilyttämiseksi,jotta vältytään loukkaantumiselta. Noudata seuraavia turvallisuusohjeita:

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.226

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 251: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Juniper Networks switch on asennettava telineeseen, joka on kiinnitettyrakennukseen.

• Jos telineessä ei ole muita laitteita, aseta laite telineen alaosaan.

• Jos laite asetetaan osaksi täytettyyn telineeseen, aloita kuormittaminensen alaosasta kaikkein raskaimmalla esineellä ja siirry sitten sen yläosaan.

• Jos telinettä varten on vakaimet, asenna ne ennen laitteen asettamistatelineeseen tai sen huoltamista siinä.

Attention Pour éviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opérations demontage ou de réparation de cette unité en casier, il convient de prendre desprécautions spécialesafindemaintenir la stabilité du système. Lesdirectivesci-dessous sont destinées à assurer la protection du personnel:

• Le rack sur lequel est monté le Juniper Networks switch doit être fixé à lastructure du bâtiment.

• Si cette unité constitue la seule unitémontéeencasier, elle doit êtreplacéedans le bas.

• Si cette unité est montée dans un casier partiellement rempli, charger lecasier de bas en haut en plaçant l'élément le plus lourd dans le bas.

• Si lecasier estéquipédedispositifs stabilisateurs, installer les stabilisateursavant demonter ou de réparer l'unité en casier.

WarnungZurVermeidungvonKörperverletzungbeimAnbringenoderWartendieser Einheit in einemGestell müssen Sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen,um sicherzustellen, daß das System stabil bleibt. Die folgenden Richtliniensollen zur Gewährleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen:

• Der Juniper Networks switchmuß in einemGestell installiert werden, dasin der Gebäudestruktur verankert ist.

• Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist, sollte sie unten im Gestellangebracht werden.

• Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefüllten Gestell ist dasGestell von unten nach oben zu laden, wobei das schwerste Bauteil untenim Gestell anzubringen ist.

• Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehör geliefert, sind zuerst dieStabilisatoren zu installieren, bevor Sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringenoder sie warten.

AvvertenzaPerevitare infortuni fisici durante ilmontaggioo lamanutenzionedi questa unità in un supporto, occorre osservare speciali precauzioni pergarantire che il sistema rimanga stabile. Le seguenti direttive vengono forniteper garantire la sicurezza personale:

227Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information

Page 252: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• Il Juniper Networks switch deve essere installato in un telaio, il quale deveessere fissato alla struttura dell'edificio.

• Questa unità deve venire montata sul fondo del supporto, se si trattadell'unica unità damontare nel supporto.

• Quando questa unità vienemontata in un supporto parzialmente pieno,caricare il supporto dal basso all'alto, con il componente più pesantesistemato sul fondo del supporto.

• Se il supporto è dotato di dispositivi stabilizzanti, installare tali dispositiviprimadimontareodiprocedereallamanutenzionedell'unitànel supporto.

AdvarselUnngå fysiske skader under montering eller reparasjonsarbeid pådenne enheten når den befinner seg i et kabinett. Vær nøyemed at systemeter stabilt. Følgende retningslinjer er gitt for å verne om sikkerheten:

• Juniper Networks switchmå installeres i et stativ som er forankret tilbygningsstrukturen.

• Denne enheten børmonteres nederst i kabinettet hvis dette er den enesteenheten i kabinettet.

• Vedmontering av denne enheten i et kabinett som er delvis fylt, skalkabinettet lastes frabunnenogoppmeddentyngstekomponentennedersti kabinettet.

• Hvis kabinettet er utstyrt med stabiliseringsutstyr, skal stabilisatoreneinstalleres før montering eller utføring av reparasjonsarbeid på enheten ikabinettet.

Aviso Para se prevenir contra danos corporais aomontar ou reparar estaunidade numaestante, deverá tomar precauções especiais para se certificarde que o sistema possui um suporte estável. As seguintes directrizesajudá-lo-ão a efectuar o seu trabalho com segurança:

• O Juniper Networks switch deverá ser instalado numa prateleira fixa àestrutura do edificio.

• Esta unidade deverá ser montada na parte inferior da estante, caso sejaesta a única unidade a ser montada.

• Aomontar esta unidade numa estante parcialmente ocupada, coloque ositensmais pesados na parte inferior da estante, arrumando-os de baixopara cima.

• Se a estante possuir um dispositivo de estabilização, instale-o antes demontar ou reparar a unidade.

¡Atención! Para evitar lesiones durante el montaje de este equipo sobre unbastidor, o posteriormente durante sumantenimiento, se debeponermuchocuidado en que el sistema quede bien estable. Para garantizar su seguridad,proceda según las siguientes instrucciones:

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.228

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 253: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• El Juniper Networks switch debe instalarse en un bastidor fijado a laestructura del edificio.

• Colocar el equipo en la parte inferior del bastidor, cuando sea la únicaunidad en el mismo.

• Cuandoesteequiposevayaa instalarenunbastidorparcialmenteocupado,comenzar la instalación desde la parte inferior hacia la superior colocandoel equipomás pesado en la parte inferior.

• Si el bastidor dispone de dispositivos estabilizadores, instalar éstos antesdemontaroprocederalmantenimientodel equipo instaladoenelbastidor.

Varning! För att undvika kroppsskada när du installerar eller utförunderhållsarbete på denna enhet på en ställningmåste du vidta särskildaförsiktighetsåtgärder föratt försäkradigomattsystemetstår stadigt. Följanderiktlinjer ges för att trygga din säkerhet:

• Juniper Networks switchmåste installeras i en ställning som är förankradi byggnadens struktur.

• Omdenna enhet är den enda enheten på ställningen skall den installeraslängst ned på ställningen.

• Omdenna enhet installeras på en delvis fylld ställning skall ställningenfyllasnedifrånochupp,meddetyngstaenheterna längstnedpåställningen.

• Omställningenär förseddmedstabiliseringsdonskalldessamonteras fastinnan enheten installeras eller underhålls på ställningen.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• Installation InstructionsWarning on page 223

• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 230

• Mounting an EX2200 Switch

• Mounting an EX3200 Switch

• Mounting an EX3300 Switch

• Mounting an EX4200 Switch on page 131

• Mounting an EX4500 Switch

• Mounting an EX6210 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet

• Mounting an EX8208 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet

• Mounting an EX8216 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet

• Mounting the EX Series Redundant Power System

• Mounting a QFX3500 Device in a Rack or Cabinet

229Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information

Page 254: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Wall-MountingWarning for EX4200 Switches

WARNING: Whenmounted in a vertical position, an EX3200 or EX4200chassis must be oriented with the front panel of the chassis pointing downto ensure proper airflow andmeet safety requirements in the event of a fire.

WARNING: Avertissement: lorsqu’installé en position verticale, un châssisde commutationEX3200ouEX4200doit être orientéavec lepanneauavantdirigé vers le bas.

WARNING: Warnhinweis: Bei der Befestigung in vertikaler Positionmuss einEX3200- oder EX4200-Switch-Gehäuse so ausgerichtet werden, dass dasvordere Bedienfeld des Switch-Gehäuses nach unten zeigt.

RelatedDocumentation

Mounting an EX4200 Switch on aWall on page 139•

Grounded EquipmentWarning

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

WARNING: Thedevice is intended tobegrounded.Duringnormaluse, ensurethat you have connected earth ground to the chassis.

Waarschuwing Deze apparatuur hoort geaard te worden Zorg dat dehost-computer tijdens normaal gebruik met aarde is verbonden.

Varoitus Tämä laitteisto on tarkoitettumaadoitettavaksi. Varmista, ettäisäntälaite on yhdistetty maahan normaalikäytön aikana.

Attention Cet équipement doit être relié à la terre. S'assurer que l'appareilhôte est relié à la terre lors de l'utilisation normale.

Warnung Dieses Gerät muß geerdet werden. Stellen Sie sicher, daß dasHost-Gerät während des normalen Betriebs an Erde gelegt ist.

AvvertenzaQuestaapparecchiaturadeveesserecollegataamassa.Accertarsiche il dispositivo host sia collegato alla massa di terra durante il normaleutilizzo.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.230

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 255: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

AdvarselDette utstyret skal jordes. Forviss deg om vertsterminalen er jordetved normalt bruk.

Aviso Este equipamento deverá estar ligado à terra. Certifique-se que o hostse encontra ligado à terra durante a sua utilização normal.

¡Atención!Esteequipodebeconectarsea tierra.Asegurarsedequeel equipoprincipal esté conectado a tierra durante el uso normal.

Varning! Denna utrustning är avsedd att jordas. Se till att värdenheten ärjordad vid normal användning.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines andWarnings

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

Whileperforming themaintenanceactivities fordevices, observe the followingguidelines

and warnings:

• Battery HandlingWarning on page 231

• Jewelry Removal Warning on page 232

• Lightning Activity Warning on page 233

• Operating TemperatureWarning on page 234

• Product Disposal Warning on page 235

Battery HandlingWarning

WARNING: Replacing a battery incorrectly might result in an explosion.Replace a battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended bythemanufacturer. Disposeof usedbatteries according to themanufacturer'sinstructions.

Waarschuwing Er is ontploffingsgevaar als de batterij verkeerd vervangenwordt. Vervang de batterij slechts met hetzelfde of een equivalent type datdoor de fabrikant aanbevolen is. Gebruikte batterijendienenovereenkomstigfabrieksvoorschriften weggeworpen te worden.

Varoitus Räjähdyksen vaara, jos akku on vaihdettu väärään akkuun. Käytävaihtamiseen ainoastaan saman- tai vastaavantyyppistä akkua, joka onvalmistajansuosittelema.Hävitäkäytetytakutvalmistajanohjeidenmukaan.

231Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information

Page 256: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Attention Danger d'explosion si la pile n'est pas remplacée correctement.Ne la remplacer que par une pile de type semblable ou équivalent,recommandée par le fabricant. Jeter les piles usagées conformément auxinstructions du fabricant.

Warnung Bei Einsetzen einer falschen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr.Ersetzen Sie die Batterie nur durch den gleichen oder vomHerstellerempfohlenen Batterietyp. Entsorgen Sie die benutzten Batterien nach denAnweisungen des Herstellers.

Advarsel Det kan være fare for eksplosjon hvis batteriet skiftes på feil måte.Skift kunmed sammeeller tilsvarende type somer anbefalt av produsenten.Kasser brukte batterier i henhold til produsentens instruksjoner.

Avvertenza Pericolo di esplosione se la batteria non è installatacorrettamente.Sostituiresoloconunadi tipougualeoequivalente, consigliatadalproduttore. Eliminare lebatterieusatesecondo le istruzionidelproduttore.

AvisoExiste perigo de explosão se a bateria for substituída incorrectamente.Substitua a bateria por uma bateria igual ou de um tipo equivalenterecomendado pelo fabricante. Destrua as baterias usadas conforme asinstruções do fabricante.

¡Atención! Existe peligro de explosión si la batería se reemplaza demaneraincorrecta. Reemplazar la batería exclusivamente con el mismo tipo o elequivalente recomendado por el fabricante. Desechar las baterías gastadassegún las instrucciones del fabricante.

Varning!Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Ersätt endast batterietmedsamma batterityp som rekommenderas av tillverkaren eller motsvarande.Följ tillverkarens anvisningar vid kassering av använda batterier.

Jewelry RemovalWarning

WARNING: Before working on equipment that is connected to power lines,remove jewelry, including rings, necklaces, and watches. Metal objects heatupwhen connected to power and ground and can cause serious burns or canbe welded to the terminals.

Waarschuwing Alvorens aan apparatuur te werken die met elektrischeleidingen is verbonden, sieraden (inclusief ringen, kettingen en horloges)verwijderen. Metalen voorwerpen worden warmwanneer zemet stroom enaarde zijn verbonden, en kunnen ernstige brandwonden veroorzaken of hetmetalen voorwerp aan de aansluitklemmen lassen.

Varoitus Ennen kuin työskentelet voimavirtajohtoihin kytkettyjen laitteidenparissa, otapois kaikki korut (sormukset, kaulakorut ja kellotmukaan lukien).Metalliesineet kuumenevat, kun ne ovat yhteydessä sähkövirran ja maan

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.232

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 257: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

kanssa, janevoivataiheuttaavakaviapalovammoja tai hitsatametalliesineetkiinni liitäntänapoihin.

AttentionAvantd'accéderàcetéquipementconnectéaux lignesélectriques,ôter toutbijou(anneaux,colliersetmontrescompris). Lorsqu'ilssontbranchésà l'alimentation et reliés à la terre, les objets métalliques chauffent, ce quipeutprovoquerdesblessuresgravesousouder l'objetmétalliqueauxbornes.

Warnung Vor der Arbeit an Geräten, die an das Netz angeschlossen sind,jeglichen Schmuck (einschließlich Ringe, Ketten und Uhren) abnehmen.Metallgegenstände erhitzen sich, wenn sie an das Netz und die Erdeangeschlossen werden, und können schwere Verbrennungen verursachenoder an die Anschlußklemmen angeschweißt werden.

Avvertenza Prima di intervenire su apparecchiature collegate alle linee dialimentazione, togliersi qualsiasi monile (inclusi anelli, collane, braccialettied orologi). Gli oggetti metallici si riscaldano quando sono collegati tra puntidi alimentazione emassa: possono causare ustioni gravi oppure il metallopuò saldarsi ai terminali.

Advarsel Fjern alle smykker (inkludert ringer, halskjeder og klokker) før duskal arbeidepåutstyr somer koblet til kraftledninger.Metallgjenstander somer koblet til kraftledninger og jord blir svært varme og kan forårsake alvorligebrannskader eller smelte fast til polene.

Aviso Antes de trabalhar em equipamento que esteja ligado a linhas decorrente, retire todas as jóias que estiver a usar (incluindo anéis, fios erelógios). Os objectosmetálicos aquecerão em contacto com a corrente eem contacto com a ligação à terra, podendo causar queimaduras graves ouficarem soldados aos terminais.

¡Atención! Antes de operar sobre equipos conectados a líneas dealimentación, quitarse las joyas (incluidos anillos, collares y relojes). Losobjetosdemetal secalientancuandoseconectana laalimentaciónyatierra,lo que puede ocasionar quemaduras graves o que los objetosmetálicosqueden soldados a los bornes.

Varning! Tag av alla smycken (inklusive ringar, halsband och armbandsur)innanduarbetarpåutrustningsomärkopplad till kraftledningar.Metallobjekthettas upp när de kopplas ihopmed ström och jord och kan förorsakaallvarliga brännskador; metallobjekt kan också sammansvetsasmedkontakterna.

Lightning ActivityWarning

WARNING: Donotworkon thesystemorconnectordisconnectcablesduringperiods of lightning activity.

233Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information

Page 258: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Waarschuwing Tijdens onweer dat gepaard gaat met bliksem, dient u nietaan het systeem te werken of kabels aan te sluiten of te ontkoppelen.

Varoitus Älä työskentele järjestelmän parissa äläkä yhdistä tai irrotakaapeleita ukkosilmalla.

AttentionNe pas travailler sur le système ni brancher ou débrancher lescâbles pendant un orage.

Warnung Arbeiten Sie nicht am System und schließen Sie keine Kabel anbzw. trennen Sie keine ab, wenn es gewittert.

AvvertenzaNon lavorare sul sistema o collegare oppure scollegare i cavidurante un temporale con fulmini.

AdvarselUtfør aldri arbeidpåsystemet, eller koble kabler til eller fra systemetnår det tordner eller lyner.

AvisoNão trabalhe no sistema ou ligue e desligue cabos durante períodosdemau tempo (trovoada).

¡Atención!No operar el sistema ni conectar o desconectar cables durante eltranscurso de descargas eléctricas en la atmósfera.

Varning!Vid åska skall du aldrig utföra arbete på systemet eller ansluta ellerkoppla loss kablar.

Operating TemperatureWarning

WARNING: To prevent the device from overheating, do not operate it in anarea that exceeds themaximum recommended ambient temperature of104° F (40° C) for EX6200 switches, EX8208 switches, EX8216 switches,QFXSeriesdevices, andXRE200ExternalRoutingEnginesand 113°F (45°C)for EX2200, EX3300, EX3200, EX4200, and EX4500 switches. To preventairflow restriction, allow at least 6 in. (15.2 cm) of clearance around theventilation openings.

WaarschuwingOm te voorkomen dat welke switch van de Juniper Networksrouter dan ook oververhit raakt, dient u deze niet te bedienen op een plaatswaar demaximale aanbevolen omgevingstemperatuur van 40° Cwordtoverschreden. Om te voorkomen dat de luchtstroomwordt beperkt, dient erminstens 15,2 cm speling rond de ventilatie-openingen te zijn.

Varoitus Ettei Juniper Networks switch-sarjan reititin ylikuumentuisi, sitä eisaa käyttää tilassa, jonka lämpötila ylittää korkeimman suositellunympäristölämpötilan 40° C. Ettei ilmanvaihto estyisi, tuuletusaukkojenympärille on jätettävä ainakin 15,2 cm tilaa.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.234

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 259: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Attention Pour éviter toute surchauffe des routeurs de la gamme JuniperNetworks switch, ne l'utilisez pas dans une zoneoù la température ambianteest supérieure à 40° C. Pour permettre un flot d'air constant, dégagez unespace d'aumoins 15,2 cm autour des ouvertures de ventilations.

WarnungUmeinenRouterder switchvorÜberhitzungzuschützen,darfdiesernicht in einer Gegend betrieben werden, in der die Umgebungstemperaturdas empfohlene Maximum von 40° C überschreitet. Um Lüftungsverschlußzu verhindern, achten Sie darauf, daßmindestens 15,2 cm lichter Raum umdie Lüftungsöffnungen herum frei bleibt.

Avvertenza Per evitare il surriscaldamento dei switch, non adoperateli in unlocale che ecceda la temperatura ambientale massima di 40° C. Per evitareche lacircolazionedell'aria sia impedita, lasciateunospaziodialmeno 15.2cmdi fronte alle aperture delle ventole.

AdvarselUnngåoveropphetingaveventuelle rutere i JuniperNetworksswitchDisse skal ikke brukes på steder der den anbefalte maksimaleomgivelsestemperaturen overstiger 40° C (104° F). Sørg for at klaringenrundt lufteåpningene er minst 15,2 cm (6 tommer) for å forhindre nedsattluftsirkulasjon.

Aviso Para evitar o sobreaquecimento do encaminhador Juniper Networksswitch, não utilize este equipamento numa área que exceda a temperaturamáxima recomendada de 40° C. Para evitar a restrição à circulação de ar,deixe pelomenos um espaço de 15,2 cm à volta das aberturas de ventilação.

¡Atención! Para impedir que un encaminador de la serie Juniper Networksswitch se recaliente, no lo haga funcionar en un área en la que se supere latemperatura ambientemáxima recomendada de 40° C. Para impedir larestricciónde laentradadeaire, dejeunespaciomínimode 15,2 cmalrededorde las aperturas para ventilación.

Varning! Förhindra att en Juniper Networks switch överhettas genomatt inteanvända den i ett område där denmaximalt rekommenderadeomgivningstemperaturenpå40°Cöverskrids. Förhindraatt luftcirkulationeninskränksgenomattse till attdet finns fritt utrymmepåminst 15,2cmomkringventilationsöppningarna.

Product DisposalWarning

WARNING: Disposal of this devicemust be handled according to all nationallaws and regulations.

Waarschuwing Dit produkt dient volgens alle landelijke wetten envoorschriften te worden afgedankt.

235Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information

Page 260: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

VaroitusTämän tuotteen lopullisesta hävittämisestä tulee huolehtia kaikkiavaltakunnallisia lakeja ja säännöksiä noudattaen.

Attention Lamise au rebut définitive de ce produit doit être effectuéeconformément à toutes les lois et réglementations en vigueur.

Warnung Dieses Produkt muß den geltenden Gesetzen und Vorschriftenentsprechend entsorgt werden.

Avvertenza L'eliminazione finale di questo prodotto deve essere eseguitaosservando le normative italiane vigenti in materia

AdvarselEndeligdisponeringavdetteproduktetmåskje ihenholdtil nasjonalelover og forskrifter.

Aviso A descartagem final deste produto deverá ser efectuada de acordocom os regulamentos e a legislação nacional.

¡Atención! El desecho final de este producto debe realizarse según todas lasleyes y regulaciones nacionales

Varning!Slutlig kasseringavdennaproduktbör skötas i enlighetmed landetsalla lagar och föreskrifter.

RelatedDocumentation

• General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213

• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 237

• AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 240

• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 243

• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for EX Series Switches on page 219

• Installation InstructionsWarning on page 223

• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 230

• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for the QFX Series

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.236

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 261: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 20

Power and Electrical Safety Information

• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 237

• Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 238

• AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 240

• AC Power DisconnectionWarning on page 241

• Multiple Power Supplies DisconnectionWarning on page 242

• PowerSourcesforRedundantPowerSuppliesWarningforEX4200Switchesonpage243

• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 243

• DC Power DisconnectionWarning on page 245

• DC Power Grounding Requirements andWarning on page 247

• DC PowerWiring SequenceWarning on page 248

• DC PowerWiring TerminationsWarning on page 249

• TN PowerWarning on page 251

• Action to Take After an Electrical Accident on page 252

General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

WARNING: Certain ports on the device are designed for use as intrabuilding(within-the-building) interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described inGR-1089-CORE, Issue4)and require isolation fromtheexposedoutsideplant

(OSP) cabling. To comply with NEBS requirements and protect againstlightning surges and commercial power disturbances, the intrabuilding portsmust not bemetallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP orits wiring. The intrabuilding ports on the device are suitable for connectionto intrabuilding or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The addition of primaryprotectors is not sufficient protection for connecting these interfacesmetallically to OSPwiring.

237Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 262: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CAUTION: Before removing or installing components of a device, attach anESD strap to an ESD point and place the other end of the strap around yourbare wrist. Failure to use an ESD strap could result in damage to the switch.

• Install the device in compliance with the following local, national, and international

electrical codes:

• United States—National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70), United States

National Electrical Code.

• Other countries—International Electromechanical Commission (IEC) 60364, Part 1

through Part 7.

• Evaluated to the TN power system.

• Canada—Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, CSA C22.1.

• Locate the emergency power-off switch for the room in which you are working so that

if an electrical accident occurs, you can quickly turn off the power.

• Make sure that grounding surfaces are cleaned and brought to a bright finish before

grounding connections are made.

• Donotworkalone if potentially hazardousconditionsexist anywhere in yourworkspace.

• Never assume thatpower is disconnected fromacircuit. Always check thecircuit before

starting to work.

• Carefully look for possible hazards in your work area, such asmoist floors, ungrounded

power extension cords, andmissing safety grounds.

• Operate the device within marked electrical ratings and product usage instructions.

• To ensure that the device and peripheral equipment function safely and correctly, use

the cables and connectors specified for the attached peripheral equipment, andmake

certain they are in good condition.

You can remove and replace many device components without powering off or

disconnectingpower to thedevice, asdetailedelsewhere in thehardwaredocumentation

for this device. Never install equipment if it appears damaged.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 240

• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 243

Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.238

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 263: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

Device components that are shipped in antistatic bags are sensitive to damage from

static electricity. Some components can be impaired by voltages as low as 30 V. You

can easily generate potentially damaging static voltages whenever you handle plastic

or foam packing material or if youmove components across plastic or carpets. Observe

the following guidelines to minimize the potential for electrostatic discharge (ESD)

damage, which can cause intermittent or complete component failures:

• AlwaysuseanESDgroundingstrapwhenyouarehandlingcomponents thatare subject

to ESD damage, andmake sure that it is in direct contact with your skin.

If a grounding strap is notavailable, hold thecomponent in its antistatic bag (seeFigure

64 on page 239) in one hand and touch the exposed, baremetal of the devicewith the

other hand immediately before inserting the component into the device.

WARNING: For safety, periodically check the resistance value of the ESDstrap. Themeasurementmust be in the range of 1 through 10Mohms.

• When handling any component that is subject to ESD damage and that is removed

from the device, make sure the equipment end of your ESD strap is attached to the

ESD point on the chassis.

If nogrounding strap is available, touch theexposed, baremetal of thedevice toground

yourself before handling the component.

• Avoidcontactbetween thecomponent that is subject toESDdamageandyourclothing.

ESD voltages emitted from clothing can damage components.

• When removing or installing a component that is subject to ESDdamage, always place

it component-side up on an antistatic surface, in an antistatic card rack, or in an

antistatic bag (see Figure 64onpage 239). If you are returning a component, place it in

an antistatic bag before packing it.

Figure 64: Place a Component into an Antistatic Bag

CAUTION: ANSI/TIA/EIA-568 cables such as Category 5e and Category 6can get electrostatically charged. To dissipate this charge, always ground

239Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information

Page 264: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

the cables to a suitable and safe earth groundbefore connecting them to thesystem.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• See EX2200 Switches Hardware Overview for the ESD point location.

• See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch for the ESD point location.

• See Rear Panel of an EX3300 Switch for the ESD point location.

• See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 8 for the ESD point location.

• See Front Panel of an EX4500 Switch for the ESD point location.

• See Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX6210 Switch for the ESD point location.

• See Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX8208 Switch for the ESD point location.

• See Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX8216 Switch for the ESD point location.

• See Front Panel of a QFX3500 Device for the ESD point location.

AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

CAUTION: For devices with AC power supplies, an external surge protectivedevice (SPD)must be used at the AC power source.

The following electrical safety guidelines apply to AC-powered devices:

• Note the following warnings printed on the device:

“CAUTION: THIS UNIT HASMORE THANONE POWER SUPPLY CORD. DISCONNECT

ALL POWER SUPPLY CORDS BEFORE SERVICING TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK.”

“ATTENTION: CET APPAREIL COMPORTE PLUS D'UN CORDON D'ALIMENTATION.AFIN DE PRÉVENIR LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, DÉBRANCHER TOUT CORDON

D'ALIMENTATION AVANT DE FAIRE LE DÉPANNAGE.”

• AC-powereddevicesare shippedwitha three-wireelectrical cordwithagrounding-type

plug that fits only a grounding-typepower outlet. Donot circumvent this safety feature.

Equipment grounding must comply with local and national electrical codes.

• Youmustprovideanexternal certifiedcircuit breaker ratedminimum20A in thebuilding

installation.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.240

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 265: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• The power cord serves as the main disconnecting device for the AC-powered device.

The socket outlet must be near the AC-powered device and be easily accessible.

• For devices that havemore than one power supply connection, youmust ensure that

all power connections are fully disconnected so that power to the device is completely

removed to avoid electric shock. To disconnect power, unplug all power cords (one

for each power supply).

Power CableWarning (Japanese)

WARNING: The attached power cable is only for this product. Do not use the cable for another product.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 237

• Multiple Power Supplies DisconnectionWarning on page 242

• Connecting AC Power to an EX2200 Switch

• Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 Switch

• Connecting AC Power to an EX3300 Switch

• Connecting AC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 158

• Connecting AC Power to an EX4500 Switch

• Connecting AC Power to an EX6200 Switch

• Connecting AC Power to an EX8200 Switch

• Connecting AC Power to an XRE200 External Routing Engine

• Connecting AC Power to a QFX3500 Device

• Connecting Power to an EX Series Redundant Power System Power Supply

AC Power DisconnectionWarning

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

241Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information

Page 266: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

WARNING: Before working on the switch or near power supplies, unplug allthe power cords from an AC switch.

Waarschuwing Voordat u aan een frame of in de nabijheid van voedingenwerkt, dient u bij wisselstroom toestellen de stekker van het netsnoer uit hetstopcontact te halen.

Varoitus Kytke irti vaihtovirtalaitteiden virtajohto, ennen kuin teet mitäänasennuspohjalle tai työskentelet virtalähteiden läheisyydessä.

AttentionAvantde travailler surunchâssisouàproximitéd'unealimentationélectrique, débrancher le cordon d'alimentation des unités en courantalternatif.

Warnung Bevor Sie an einem Chassis oder in der Nähe von Netzgerätenarbeiten, ziehen Sie bei Wechselstromeinheiten das Netzkabel ab bzw.

AvvertenzaPrimadi lavorare suun telaioo intornoadalimentatori, scollegareil cavo di alimentazione sulle unità CA.

Advarsel Før det utføres arbeid på kabinettet eller det arbeides i nærhetenav strømforsyningsenheter, skal strømledningen trekkes ut påvekselstrømsenheter.

AvisoAntesdetrabalharnumchassis,ouantesdetrabalharpertodeunidadesde fornecimento de energia, desligue o cabo de alimentação nas unidadesde corrente alternada.

¡Atención!Antes demanipular el chasis de un equipoo trabajar cerca deunafuentedealimentación, desenchufar el cabledealimentaciónen losequiposde corriente alterna (CA).

Varning! Innanduarbetarmedett chassi eller nära strömförsörjningsenheterskall du för växelströmsenheter dra ur nätsladden.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 237

• AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 240

Multiple Power Supplies DisconnectionWarning

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.242

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 267: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

WARNING: For a device that hasmore than one power supply connection,youmust ensure that all power connections are fully disconnected so thatpower to the device is completely removed.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 237

• AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 240

• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 243

Power Sources for Redundant Power SuppliesWarning for EX4200 Switches

EX4200 switches have a redundant power supply. When you have redundant power

supplies in a switch, youmust connect each power supply to a different input power

source. Failure to do somakes the switch susceptible to total power failure if one of the

power supplies fails.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 237

• AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 240

DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches and the XRE200 External Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

243Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information

Page 268: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• A DC-powered device is equipped with a DC terminal block that is rated for the power

requirements of a maximally configured device.

NOTE: Tosupplysufficientpower, terminate theDC inputwiringona facilityDC source that is capable of supplying:

• Minimum of 7.5 A at –48 VDC for EX2200 and EX3300 switches

• Minimum of 8 A at –48 VDC for EX3200 and EX4200 switches

• Minimum of 50 A at –48 VDC for EX6210 switches

• Minimum of 60 A at –48 VDC for EX8208 switches

• Minimum of 100 A at –48 VDC for EX8216 switches

• Minimum of 7 A at –48 VDC for QFX3500 devices

Incorporate an easily accessible disconnect device into the facility wiring. Be sure to

connect the ground wire or conduit to a solid office earth ground. A closed loop ring is

recommended for terminating the ground conductor at the ground stud.

• Run two wires from the circuit breaker box to a source of 48 VDC.

• A DC-powered device that is equipped with a DC terminal block is intended only for

installation in a restricted access location. In the United States, a restricted access

area isone inaccordancewithArticles 110-16, 110-17, and 110-18of theNational Electrical

Code ANSI/NFPA 70.

NOTE: Primary overcurrent protection is provided by the building circuitbreaker. This breaker must protect against excess currents, short circuits,and earth grounding faults in accordance with NEC ANSI/NFPA 70.

• Ensure that the polarity of the DC input wiring is correct. Under certain conditions,

connections with reversed polarity might trip the primary circuit breaker or damage

the equipment.

• For personal safety, connect the green and yellowwire to safety (earth) ground at both

the device and the supply side of the DC wiring.

• Themarked input voltage of –48 VDC for a DC-powered device is the nominal voltage

associated with the battery circuit, and any higher voltages are only to be associated

with float voltages for the charging function.

• Because the device is a positive ground system, youmust connect the positive lead to

the terminal labeled RTN, the negative lead to the terminal labeled –48 VDC, and the

earth ground to the device grounding points.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 237

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.244

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 269: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• DC Power DisconnectionWarning on page 245

• DC Power Grounding Requirements andWarning on page 247

• DC PowerWiring SequenceWarning on page 248

• DC PowerWiring TerminationsWarning on page 249

• Connecting DC Power to an EX2200 Switch

• Connecting DC Power to an EX3200 Switch

• Connecting DC Power to an EX4200 Switch on page 160

• Connecting DC Power to an EX4500 Switch

• Connecting DC Power to an EX6200 Switch

• Connecting DC Power to an EX8200 Switch

• Connecting DC Power to an XRE200 External Routing Engine

• Connecting DC Power to a QFX3500 Device

DC Power DisconnectionWarning

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches and the XRE200 External Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

WARNING: Before performing any of the DC power procedures, ensure thatpower is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locatethe circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch thecircuit breaker to the OFF position, and tape the device handle of the circuitbreaker in the OFF position.

Waarschuwing Voordat u een van de onderstaande procedures uitvoert,dientu tecontrolerenofdestroomnaarhetgelijkstroomcircuit uitgeschakeldis. Om u ervan te verzekeren dat alle stroomUIT is geschakeld, kiest u op hetschakelbord de stroomverbreker die het gelijkstroom circuit bedient, draaitde stroomverbreker naar de UIT positie en plakt de schakelaarhendel van destroomverbreker met plakband in de UIT positie vast.

Varoitus Varmista, että tasavirtapiirissä ei ole virtaa ennen seuraavientoimenpiteiden suorittamista. Varmistaaksesi, että virta on KATKAISTUtäysin,paikannatasavirrastahuolehtivassakojetaulussasijaitsevasuojakytkin,käännä suojakytkin KATKAISTU-asentoon ja teippaa suojakytkimen varsiniin, että se pysyy KATKAISTU-asennossa.

Attention Avant de pratiquer l'une quelconque des procédures ci-dessous,vérifier que le circuit en courant continu n'est plus sous tension. Pour en êtresûr, localiser ledisjoncteur situésur lepanneaudeserviceducircuit encourant

245Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information

Page 270: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

continu, placer le disjoncteur enposition fermée (OFF) et, à l'aide d'un rubanadhésif, bloquer la poignée du disjoncteur en position OFF.

Warnung Vor Ausführung der folgenden Vorgänge ist sicherzustellen, daßdie Gleichstromschaltung keinen Strom erhält. Um sicherzustellen, daßsämtlicher Strom abgestellt ist, machen Sie auf der Schalttafel denUnterbrecher für die Gleichstromschaltung ausfindig, stellen Sie denUnterbrecher auf AUS, und kleben Sie den Schaltergriff des Unterbrechersmit Klebeband in der AUS-Stellung fest.

AvvertenzaPrimadi svolgereunaqualsiasidelleprocedureseguenti, verificareche il circuito CC non sia alimentato. Per verificare che tutta l'alimentazionesia scollegata (OFF), individuare l'interruttore automatico sul quadrostrumenti che alimenta il circuito CC, mettere l'interruttore in posizione OFFe fissarlo con nastro adesivo in tale posizione.

Advarsel Før noen av disse prosedyrene utføres, kontroller at strømmen erfrakoblet likestrømkretsen. Sørg for at all strøm er slått AV. Dette gjøres vedå lokalisere strømbryteren på brytertavlen som betjener likestrømkretsen,slå strømbryterenAVog teipebryterhåndtaketpåstrømbryteren iAV-stilling.

AvisoAntes de executar umdos seguintes procedimentos, certifique-se quedesligou a fonte de alimentação de energia do circuito de corrente contínua.Para se assegurar que toda a corrente foi DESLIGADA, localize o disjuntor nopainel que serve o circuito de corrente contínua e coloque-o na posição OFF(Desligado), segurandonessaposiçãoamanivelado interruptor dodisjuntorcom fita isoladora.

¡Atención! Antes de proceder con los siguientes pasos, comprobar que laalimentacióndelcircuitodecorrientecontinua(CC)estécortada(OFF).Paraasegurarse de que toda la alimentación esté cortada (OFF), localizar elinterruptor automático en el panel que alimenta al circuito de corrientecontinua, cambiar el interruptor automático a la posicióndeApagado (OFF),y sujetar con cinta la palanca del interruptor automático en posición deApagado (OFF).

Varning! Innan du utför någon av följande procedurer måste du kontrolleraatt strömförsörjningen till likströmskretsen är bruten. Kontrollera att allströmförsörjning är BRUTEN genomatt slå AV det överspänningsskydd somskyddar likströmskretsen och tejpa fast överspänningsskyddets omkopplarei FRÅN-läget.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 237

• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 243

• DC Power Grounding Requirements andWarning on page 247

• DC PowerWiring SequenceWarning on page 248

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.246

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 271: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• DC PowerWiring TerminationsWarning on page 249

DC Power Grounding Requirements andWarning

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches and the XRE200 External Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

An insulatedgroundingconductor that is identical in size to thegroundedandungrounded

branchcircuit supply conductorsbut is identifiablebygreenandyellowstripes is installed

as part of the branch circuit that supplies the device. The grounding conductor is a

separately derived system at the supply transformer or motor generator set.

WARNING: When you install the device, the ground connectionmust alwaysbemade first and disconnected last.

WaarschuwingBij de installatie vanhet toestelmoetdeaardverbindingaltijdhet eerste worden gemaakt en het laatste worden losgemaakt.

Varoitus Laitetta asennettaessa onmaahan yhdistäminen aina tehtäväensiksi ja maadoituksen irti kytkeminen viimeiseksi.

Attention Lors de l'installation de l'appareil, la mise à la terre doit toujoursêtre connectée en premier et déconnectée en dernier.

Warnung Der Erdanschlußmuß bei der Installation der Einheit immer zuersthergestellt und zuletzt abgetrennt werden.

Avvertenza In fase di installazione dell'unità, eseguire sempre per primo ilcollegamento amassa e disconnetterlo per ultimo.

AdvarselNår enheten installeres, må jordledningen alltid tilkobles først ogfrakobles sist.

Aviso Ao instalar a unidade, a ligação à terra deverá ser sempre a primeira aser ligada, e a última a ser desligada.

¡Atención!Al instalar el equipo, conectar la tierra la primera y desconectarlala última.

Varning!Vid installationavenhetenmåste jordledningenalltid anslutas förstoch kopplas bort sist.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 237

• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 243

• DC Power DisconnectionWarning on page 245

247Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information

Page 272: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• DC PowerWiring SequenceWarning on page 248

• DC PowerWiring TerminationsWarning on page 249

DC PowerWiring SequenceWarning

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches and the XRE200 External Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

WARNING: Wire the DC power supply using the appropriate lugs. Whenconnecting power, the proper wiring sequence is ground to ground, +RTN to+RTN, then –48 V to –48 V.When disconnecting power, the proper wiringsequence is –48 V to –48 V, +RTN to +RTN, then ground to ground. Notethat the ground wire must always be connected first and disconnected last.

WaarschuwingDe juiste bedradingsvolgorde verbonden is aarde naar aarde,+RTN naar +RTN, en –48 V naar – 48 V. De juiste bedradingsvolgordelosgemaakt is en –48 naar –48 V, +RTN naar +RTN, aarde naar aarde.

VaroitusOikea yhdistettava kytkentajarjestys onmaajohtomaajohtoon,+RTN varten +RTN, –48 V varten – 48 V. Oikea irrotettava kytkentajarjestyson –48 V varten – 48 V, +RTN varten +RTN, maajohtomaajohtoon.

Attention Câblez l'approvisionnement d'alimentation CC En utilisant lescrochets appropriés à l'extrémité de câblage. En reliant la puissance, l'ordreapproprié de câblage est rectifié pour rectifier, +RTN à +RTN, puis –48 V à–48 V. En débranchant la puissance, l'ordre approprié de câblage est –48 Và–48V, +RTNà+RTN, a alors rectifié pour rectifier. Notez que le fil demassedevrait toujours être relié d'abord et débranché pour la dernière fois. Notezque le fil demasse devrait toujours être relié d'abord et débranché pour ladernière fois.

WarnungDieStromzufuhr ist nurmit geeignetenRingösenandasDCNetzteilanzuschliessen. Die richtige Anschlusssequenz ist: Erdanschluss zuErdanschluss, +RTN zu +RTN und dann -48V zu -48V. Die richtige Sequenzzum Abtrennen der Stromversorgung ist -48V zu -48V, +RTN zu +RTN unddannErdanschlusszuErdanschluss.Es ist zubeachtendassderErdanschlussimmer zuerst angeschlossen und als letztes abgetrennt wird.

AvvertenzaMostra lamorsettieradellalimentatoreCC.Cablare l'alimentatoreCC usando i connettori adatti all'estremità del cablaggio, come illustrato. Lacorretta sequenza di cablaggio è damassa amassa, da positivo a positivo(da linea ad L) e da negativo a negativo (da neutro aN). Tenere presente cheil filodimassadevesemprevenire collegatoperprimoescollegatoperultimo.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.248

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 273: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Advarsel Riktig tilkoples tilkoplingssekvens er jord til jord, +RTN til +RTN,–48V til – 48V. Riktig frakoples tilkoplingssekvens er –48V til – 48V, +RTNtil +RTN, jord til jord.

Aviso Ate con alambre la fuente de potencia cc Usando los terminalesapropiados en el extremo del cableado. Al conectar potencia, la secuenciaapropiada del cableado semuele paramoler, +RTNa+RTN, entonces –48Va –48 V. Al desconectar potencia, la secuencia apropiada del cableado es–48 V a –48 V, +RTN a +RTN, entoncesmolió paramoler. Observe que elalambrede tierra sedebeconectar siempreprimeroydesconectarporúltimo.Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre primero ydesconectar por último.

¡Atención!Wire a fonte de alimentaçãodeDCUsandoos talões apropriadosna extremidade da fiação. Ao conectar a potência, a seqüência apropriadada fiação émoída paramoer, +RTN a +RTN, então –48 V a –48 V. Aodesconectar a potência, a seqüência apropriada da fiação é –48 V a –48 V,+RTN a +RTN, moeu então paramoer. Anote que o fio à terra deve sempreser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por último. Anote que o fio àterra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por último.

Varning! Korrekt kopplingssekvens ar jord till jord, +RTN till +RTN, –48 V till–48V. Korrekt kopplas kopplingssekvens ar –48V till –48V, +RTN till +RTN,jord till jord.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 237

• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 243

• DC Power DisconnectionWarning on page 245

• DC Power Grounding Requirements andWarning on page 247

• DC PowerWiring TerminationsWarning on page 249

DC PowerWiring TerminationsWarning

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches and the XRE200 External Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

WARNING: When stranded wiring is required, use approved wiringterminations, such as closed-loop or spade-type with upturned lugs. Theseterminationsmustbe theappropriate size for thewires andmust clampboththe insulation and conductor.

249Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information

Page 274: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

WaarschuwingWanneer geslagen bedrading vereist is, dient u bedrading tegebruiken die voorzien is van goedgekeurde aansluitingspunten, zoals hetgesloten-lus typeofhetgrijperschop typewaarbij deaansluitpuntenomhoogwijzen. Deze aansluitpunten dienen de juistemaat voor de draden te hebbenen dienen zowel de isolatie als de geleider vast te klemmen.

Varoitus Jos säikeellinen johdinon tarpeen, käytähyväksyttyä johdinliitäntää,esimerkiksi suljettua silmukkaa tai kourumaista liitäntää, jossa on ylöspäinkäännetyt kiinnityskorvat. Tällaisten liitäntöjen tulee olla kooltaan johtimiinsopivia ja niiden tulee puristaa yhteen sekä eristeen että johdinosan.

AttentionQuand des fils torsadés sont nécessaires, utiliser des douillesterminales homologuées telles que celles à circuit fermé ou du type à plageouverte avec cosses rebroussées. Ces douilles terminales doivent être de lataille qui convient aux fils et doivent être refermées sur la gaine isolante etsur le conducteur.

WarnungWenn Litzenverdrahtung erforderlich ist, sind zugelasseneVerdrahtungsabschlüsse, z.B. für einen geschlossenen Regelkreis odergabelförmig, mit nach oben gerichteten Kabelschuhen zu verwenden. DieseAbschlüsse solltendie angemesseneGröße für dieDrähtehabenundsowohldie Isolierung als auch den Leiter festklemmen.

AvvertenzaQuando occorre usare trecce, usare connettori omologati, comequelli a occhiello o a forcella con linguette rivolte verso l'alto. I connettoridevono avere lamisura adatta per il cablaggio e devono serrare sia l'isolanteche il conduttore.

AdvarselHvis det er nødvendigmed flertrådede ledninger, brukes godkjenteledningsavslutninger, som for eksempel lukket sløyfe eller spadetypemedoppoverbøyde kabelsko. Disse avslutningene skal ha riktig størrelse i forholdtil ledningene, og skal klemme sammen både isolasjonen og lederen.

AvisoQuando forem requeridasmontagens de instalação eléctrica de cabotorcido,use terminaçõesdecaboaprovadas, tais como, terminaçõesdecaboem circuito fechado e planas com terminais de orelha voltados para cima.Estas terminações de cabo deverão ser do tamanho apropriado para osrespectivos cabos, e deverão prender simultaneamente o isolamento e o fiocondutor.

¡Atención! Cuando se necesite hilo trenzado, utilizar terminales para cableshomologados, tales como las de tipo "bucle cerrado" o "espada", con laslengüetas de conexión vueltas hacia arriba. Estos terminales deberán ser deltamañoapropiadopara loscablesqueseutilicen, y tendránquesujetar tantoel aislante como el conductor.

Varning!När flertrådiga ledningar krävsmåste godkända ledningskontakteranvändas, t.ex. kabelsko av sluten eller öppen typmed uppåtvänd tapp.Storlekenpådessakontaktermåstevaraavpassad till ledningarnaochmåstekunna hålla både isoleringen och ledaren fastklämda.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.250

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 275: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 237

• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 243

• DC Power DisconnectionWarning on page 245

• DC Power Grounding Requirements andWarning on page 247

• DC PowerWiring SequenceWarning on page 248

TN PowerWarning

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

WARNING: The device is designed to work with a TN power system.

WaarschuwingHet apparaat is ontworpen om te functionerenmet TNenergiesystemen.

Varoitus Koje on suunniteltu toimimaan TN-sähkövoimajärjestelmienyhteydessä.

Attention Ce dispositif a été conçu pour fonctionner avec des systèmesd'alimentation TN.

WarnungDasGerät ist fürdieVerwendungmitTN-Stromsystemenausgelegt.

Avvertenza Il dispositivo è stato progettato per l'uso con sistemi dialimentazione TN.

AdvarselUtstyret er utfomet til brukmed TN-strømsystemer.

AvisoO dispositivo foi criado para operar com sistemas de corrente TN.

¡Atención! El equipo está diseñado para trabajar con sistemas dealimentación tipo TN.

Varning! Enheten är konstruerad för användning tillsammansmedelkraftssystem av TN-typ.

RelatedDocumentation

General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213•

• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 237

• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 230

• Multiple Power Supplies DisconnectionWarning on page 242

251Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information

Page 276: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Action to Take After an Electrical Accident

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.

If an electrical accident results in an injury, take the following actions in this order:

1. Use caution. Be aware of potentially hazardous conditions that could cause further

injury.

2. Disconnect power from the device.

3. If possible, send another person to get medical aid. Otherwise, assess the condition

of the victim, then call for help.

RelatedDocumentation

• General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 213

• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 237

• AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 240

• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 243

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.252

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 277: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

PART 9

Compliance Information

• Compliance Information on page 255

253Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 278: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.254

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 279: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

CHAPTER 21

Compliance Information

• Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches on page 255

• Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches on page 256

• Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches on page 259

• Declaration of Conformity for EX4200 Switches on page 260

Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

These hardware devices comply with the following standards:

• Safety

• CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-1 (2007) Information Technology Equipment

• UL 60950-1 (2nd Ed.) Information Technology Equipment

• EN 60950-1 (2006) Information Technology Equipment

• IEC 60950-1 (2005) Information Technology Equipment

• EN 60825-1 (2007) Safety of Laser Products - Part 1: Equipment classification and

requirements

• EMC

• FCC 47CFR Part 15 Class A (USA)

• EN 55022 Class A Emissions (Europe)

• ICES-003 Class A

• VCCI Class A (Japan)

• AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class A (Australia/New Zealand)

• CISPR 22 Class A

• EN 55024

255Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Page 280: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• EN 300386

• EN 61000-3-2 Power Line Harmonics

• EN 61000-3-3 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker

• EN 61000-4-2 ESD

• EN 61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity

• EN 61000-4-4 EFT

• EN 61000-4-5 Surge

• EN 61000-4-6 Low Frequency Common Immunity

• EN 61000-4-11 Voltage Dips and Sags

RelatedDocumentation

Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches on page 256•

• Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches on page 259

Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

This topic describes the EMC requirements for these hardware devices for:

• Canada on page 256

• European Community on page 257

• Japan on page 257

• Korea on page 257

• United States on page 258

• FCC Part 15 Statement on page 258

• Nonregulatory Environmental Standards on page 258

Canada

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that

the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and

safety requirements. Industry Canada does not guarantee the equipment will operate to

the users’ satisfaction.

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.256

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 281: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to connect the

equipment to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment

must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the

inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended bymeans

of a certified connector assembly. The customer should be aware that compliance with

the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.

Repairs to certified equipment should bemade by an authorized Canadianmaintenance

facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this

equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company

cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.

CAUTION: Users should not attempt tomake electrical ground connectionsby themselves, but should contact the appropriate inspection authority oran electrician, as appropriate.

Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of

the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are

connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.

European Community

This is a Class A device. In a domestic environment this device may cause radio

interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Japan

The preceding translates as follows:

This is a Class A device. In a domestic environment this device may cause radio

interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

VCCI-A

Korea

Korean Class A Warning g040

913

257Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 21: Compliance Information

Page 282: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

The preceding translates as follows:

This equipment is Industrial (Class A) electromagnetic wave suitability equipment and

seller or user should takenoticeof it, and this equipment is tobeused in theplacesexcept

for home

United States

The device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital

device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide

reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in

a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio

frequencyenergyand, if not installedandused inaccordancewith the instructionmanual,

may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment

in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be

required to correct the interference at his own expense.

FCC Part 15 Statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital

device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide

reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a

particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which

can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try

and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the

receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help.

Nonregulatory Environmental Standards

NEBS compliance—These EX Series switch models are Network Equipment BuildingSystem (NEBS) compliant:

• EX2200-24T and EX2200-48T

• EX3200-24T, EX3200-48T, EX4200-24F, EX4200-24T, and EX4200-48T

• All EX8200models

Those switch models meet the following NEBS compliance standards:

• SR-3580 NEBS Criteria Levels (Level 3 Compliance)

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.258

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches

Page 283: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

• GR-1089-CORE:EMCandElectricalSafety forNetworkTelecommunicationsEquipment

• GR-63-CORE: NEBS, Physical Protection

• The equipment is suitable for installation as part of the Common Bonding Network

(CBN).

• The equipment is suitable for installation in locations where the National Electrical

Code (NEC) applies.

• The battery return connection is to be treated as an Isolated DC return (DC-I), as

defined in GR-1089-CORE.

RelatedDocumentation

Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches on page 255•

• Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches on page 259

Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes

switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External

Routing Engine.

Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung - 3. GPSGV, der höchste Schalldruckpegel

beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gemäss EN ISO 7779

Translation:

The emitted sound pressure is below 70 dB(A) per EN ISO 7779.

RelatedDocumentation

Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches on page 255•

• Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches on page 256

259Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 21: Compliance Information

Page 284: Juniper Ex4200 Hardware Guide

Declaration of Conformity for EX4200 Switches

RelatedDocumentation

• Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches on page 255

• Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches on page 256

• Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches on page 259

Copyright © 2012, Juniper Networks, Inc.260

Complete Hardware Guide for EX4200 Ethernet Switches